The first semester WEEK 1: Date of preparation : 21/ 8 / 2011 Date of teaching : 22/ 8 / 2011 Period 1. Introduction A.

The aims and Objectives: - Hepl Ss have general knowledge of a new subject and know how to study EL 6. Ss know the contents of the Tieng Anh 6. - By the end of this lesson, Ss will able to understand Sth about EL,know how to learn English effectively, know the content of Tieng Anh 6. * Knowledge: To present the subject, student book, homework book, the way how to learn English * Skill: Speaking, listening . B. Teaching procedure: I/ Preparation: - Teachers preparation: lesson plan, posters,text book, work book. - Ss preparation: books, notebooks. II. Checking: -Not check C/ New lesson: Teacher/ s activities 1.S lc v mn Ting Anh v SGK(10ms) How many units are there in English book? Presents how many lessons in each unit EL l ngn ng ph bin nht trn th gii hin nay 2.Cu trc SGK Ting Anh 6(10ms) - T asks Ss to open their books. T introduces the strucsture of the Tieng Anh 6. - Sch gm 16 n v bi hc (16 unit) Mi bi gm 2-3 phn(A-B-C). 3.Gii thiu cch hc mn Ting Anh: - T introduces to Ss some ways of learning EL. * Present the class statements(10ms) -Teacher statements: + Stand up, please + Go to the board, please + Come back your seat, please. + Write down, please + Hand up, please + Keep silent, please + Repeat/ again Listen and repeat 1 Students/ activities There are 16 units From 5 to 6 lessons Repeat in chorus - Ss open the book

Do following teacher statements - Listen and give ideas. - Take notes( Ss discuss in pairs to decide some best ways of learning El.)

Listen and copy down

+ Give me some examples + Learn by heart vocabulary + Answer the questions Gives the class regulations:(5ms) (By Vietnamese) Asks the students to rebuild the class regulations III. Consolidation:(5) Asks them to learn by heart the class| statements

Copy down on the notebook

IV. Homework:(2ms) - Learn by heart all old structures grammar - Preparing new lesson : Unit 1 (A1-4) WEEK 1: Date of preparation : 23/ 8 / 2011 Date of teaching : 24/ 8 / 2011 Period 2. Unit 1: Greetings Lesson 1: A1-4 A/The aims and Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, ss are able to use Hi, Hello, Im / My names , to know greeting each other and introduce theirselves (name), Numbering from 0 to 5,to introduce themselves correctly and fluently. Threy use numbers from 0 to 5 to count. * Knowledge: To present: - Hello/ Hi / I am ..../ My name is........to introduce yourself -Number 0-5 * Skill: - Develop 4 skills: L,S R,&W. B/Teaching procedure: I/ Organization: - Greeting(1m) - Check attendance II/ Preparation: - Teachers preparation: lesson plan, posters. - Ss preparation: books, notebooks. III/ Checking: -Not check C/ New lesson: Teacher/ s activities 1.Presentation1 (10ms) + Pre teach: (vocabulary) - T. Elicits vocabulary - Present these vocabulary: Hello: Xin cho (Translation) Hi: Xin cho(Translation) Name: Tn(Translation) Is/ Am: L(Translation) 2 Students/ activities Listen and repeat in chorus and individually Copy down SS play a game work in pair Ss work in pair to introduce yourself for example: Hi, I am Lan

I: ti, t, mnh(Translation) +Checking: R.O.R +Dialogue build:T st the scene: Lan talking to Nga,Ba is talking to Nam. -T elicits the dialogue. a.Lan: Hi, I am Lan Nga: Hi, I am Nga b.Ba: Hello, My name is Ba Nam: Hello, My name is Nam - T asks Ss to fill in the blank. - T Helps Ss practice dialogue in pairs 2. Presentation (15ms)A2,4(11) - T asks Ss to work in groups of 4, Ss greet & introduce themselves. T checks some pairs. * Presentation 2: 1.Vocabulary: + Pre teach: Present number 0-5: Oh: 0/ - One:1 - Two:2/ - Three: 3 - Four: 4/ - Five: 5 +Checking: Slap the board. 3.Practice:(15) +Dictation:T reads: Oh- Five- One- Two- Four. +Words cue drill: Use some words cue to write telephone numbers And make a dialogue: T: Quang Ninh, please. S: Oh- Three- Three -T asks Students anwer in chorus -Calls some pairs to act out.

SS listen and repeat in chorus and individually And then copy down on their notebooks -SS work in group: A-B -Each group has 6 students Write the letter on their notebook in teacher|s order. Keys: + Hi.Im Lan + Hello.My names Ba

Quang Ninh

033

Hue

054

Quang Tri 053

Da Nang

0511

Ha Noi 04

Hai Phong 031

III.Consolidation:(3ms) - Retell briefly the ways of greeting and introducing oneself &numbers from 0 to 5. Guessing game: uses the words cue drill cards-Students guess the numbers He says Yes/No S1: Oh- Three- Three S2: No S3: Oh-Five- One-One S2: Yes IV.Homework:(2m) + Leart by heart vocabulary and cardinal numbers + Do exercises 1,2 page 4(Homework book) _________________________________________________________________________________________ 3

WEEK 1: Date of preparation : 26 / 8 / 2011 Date of teaching : 27 / 8 / 2011 Period 3. Unit 1: Greetings Lesson 2: A5-8 A.The aims and Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, ss are able to use How are you?- Im fine,thanks to greet fluently, Ss can count & write from 6 to 10 correctly and quickly. (Ask and answer the question: How are you? And the anwer : Iam fine, thanks Number from 6 to 10.) *Knowledge:To present: - How are you? I am five, thanhsto greet each other -Number 6-10 *Skill: Develop 4 skills. B/Teaching procedure: I/ Organization: (1m) Greeting & Check attendance II/ Preparation: - Teachers preparation: lesson plan, posters.(jumbled words) - Ss preparation: books, notebooks,do homeworks. III/ Checking: -T sticks the poster on the bb. 1. rofu = 2.loelh = 3.enma = 4.ether = 5.ifev = - T asks Ss to rearrange the letters to make them meaningful words . - T devides Ss in to 2 teams. One by one to go to the bb to write .T corects and finds out the winner . *Answer keys: 1.four; 2.hello; 3.name; 4.three; 5.five *** New lesson: Teacher/ s activities 1.Presentation 1(10ms) + Pre teach:Vocabulary:- T elicits words - Present these vocabulary: Fine, thanks: Kho, cm n(meaning) Miss: C(meaning) (cha c gia nh) Mrs:B(meaning) - Mr : ng, ngi.( t trc tn ngi n ng) +Checking: What and where: 2. Asks and answer about the health. -T sets the scene: Lan goes to school and meets Ba. She greats him. T elicit the dialogue. +R O R dialogue: a.Lan: Hi, Lan Nga: Hi, Nga Lan: How are you? Nga:I am fine, thanks + Model sentence: How are you? 4 Students/ activities

SS listen and repeat in chorus and individially And then copy down on their notebook

Work in group

Work in pairs to ask and answer the questions: + How are you? + I am fine. - Practice in pair

I am fine, thank you Copy down. 3. Practice:(20ms) -Practice with a partner . *A6(12): - T elicits 2 pics, asks Ss to make similar T: How are you? dialogue in pairs. S:... - Then T checks some pairs. -Go to the boarb and write down the old * A7(13): T asks Ss to fill in the gaps to make a numbers( one by one). completed dialogue between Nam and Lan. -Work individially. - T checks some pairs and corrects mistakes. Presentation 2: -Repeat in chorus and individial +Revision numbers from 0 to 5: + Pre teach: Present number 6 to 10: - Six: 6 - Seven: 7 - Eight: 8 - Nine: 9 - Ten: 10 +Checking: matching -Work in pairs.Listen to teacher and slap * Practice: + Dictation:-T. reads some telephone the word that they hear). - Students to listen and write down by numbers. English these telephone numbers Asks students to listen and write down by English these telephone numbers: 820.029 / 950.443 / 22.653 / 621.590 / 510.682 / 768.527. Write down the words that they hear on 3.Further practice:(7ms)+Work square(poster). their notebooks. - Then T controls and corects. Work in group(2 groups) F S E O T -Go to the boarb and circle the word that I N I N e they find on the work square. V T G X n Anwer key: E w H O o Five, Two, Eight, Ten G O T E l Nine, Ten, Four, One One T F O U r Seven s i x v n Six s e v e n III.Consolidation:(3ms)- How to ask &answer about health Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-10 IV.Homework:(5ms)Do the numbers3,4 page 5(Homework book). -Learn by heart vocab,numbers,the ways to asks & answer about the health. -Ss revise numbers from 0 to 10. - Pepare for next lesson. ________________________________________________________________________________ WEEK 2: Date of preparation : 28 / 8 / 2011 Date of teaching : 29 / 8 / 2011 Period 4 Unit 1: Greetings Lesson 3: B1-3 A/Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use Good afternoon / good morning/ bye to greet one 5

another and count- Write numbers from 10 to 15 correctly and fluently. - T Helps Ss develop 4 skills (Develops Ss speaking skill.) *Knowledge: To present: - Good morning/ good afternoon to greet each other/Number 11 to 15. B/Preparation: - Teachers preparation: lesson plan, posters,picture cues(4), Cards(5) - Ss preparation: books, notebooks,do homeworks. C/Procedure: I. Organization: (1m) Greeting & Check attendance II. Checking up: (5ms) a)T asks S1 to write how to ask and answer about the health on the bb. And then read aloud. b) T asks S2 write numbers from 6 to 10 and then read aloud. Keys:a) S1- Hi. How are you? b) 6.six /7.seven / 8.eight / 9.nine / 10.ten. S2 Im fine, thanks. And you? S1- Fine ,thanks. - T corrects and gives marks III.New lesson: Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities 1.Presentation (10ms) + Pre teach: Present these vocabulary: Good morning:Cho(Bui sng)- picture -visual Listen and repeat in chorus and Good afternoon:Cho(Bui chiu) )- picture individually Good everning:Cho(Bui ti) )- explaination Copy down Good night:Chc ng ngon- Meaning- trans Good bye:Cho tm bit( Mine- Situation) Children:Tr em( picture- visual) Work individually We: (pro) chng ti,chng t, chng ta(ngi 1 s -Go to the board and write down. nhiu- situation) +Checking: R & R. 2.Practice:(5ms)( B1,2(14,15) - work in pairs *:T elicits 5 pictures B1& helps Ss practise greeting one another in pairs. - Ss listen. Eg: S1- Good morning ! S2- Good morning ! -Read in chorus, Half half, T- Ss, Picture drill. groups of table or groups of 3. -T runs through the pictures. -Work in pairs Example Exchange: S1: Good (morning) S2: Good (morning) *B3(P15)(5ms):Presentation dialogue - T sets the scene: Miss Hoa is talking to her Ss. 6 Ss translate dialogue in to vietnamese

T helps Ss read dialogue (a) P 15 in chorus, T-wc, SS,Groups of 3,or groups of table -T asks Ss to translate dialogue in to vietnamese (Note:We are = Were). *B4(P16) (4ms)*Practice:T sets the scene: Lan meets Nga when she goes to school. - T asks Ss to fill in the gaps.Then T checks some pairs. T gives answer keys. *.Practice:(6ms)- T elicits numbers from 11 to 15 +Word cues drill :Run through the cues, asks Ss calculate & give result s.Lets practise in pairs. -T gets feedback . Eleven: 11 / Twelve: 12 / Thirteen: 13 Fourteen:14 / Fifteen: 15 9+2 10 + 2 7+8 7+5 5+ 6

-Work in pairs following example exchange: S1: Seven and eight? S2: Fifteen *keys: + Nga: Good afternoon,Lan. + Nga: Im fine, thanks Practice in pairs. Listen and repeat in chorus Ss work individually to read numbers from 0 to 15 in the following ways:

+ oh,one,two,three.. + oh, two,four,six + one, three,five,seven

6+8

Ss listen and write. Work individually.

3.Further practice:(12ms) +Dictation: Teacher reads: Six, twelve, two, five, thirteen, eight, eleven, four,fourteen, seven, ten, fifteen, one, three, oh, nine III.Consolidation:(2ms): - Asks Ss sums up the main contents of the lesson: to great one another, numbers from 0 to 15 IV.Homework:(1ms): -Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-15 & vocabulary. -Do the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book).Prepare for next lesson. ________________________________________________________________ WEEK 2: Date of preparation : 30 / 8 / 2011 Date of teaching : 31 / 8 / 2011 Period 5 Unit 1: Greetings Lesson 4: C1-2-3 A/The aim and Objectives: I.The aims: - Help Ss use How old are you?- Im to talk about ages, count & write numbers from 16 to 20. Develop 4 skills. II.The objectives: -By the end of this lesson, ss will be able to use How old are you? Im + ages. To talk about the ages and contrast with How are you?. 7

- Ss can count from 16 to 20 correctly and fluently - Develops Ss speaking and reading skill. *Knowledge: To present: -How old are you to talk about age and contrast with How are you -Number 16 to 20 B/Preparation: - Teachers preparation: lesson plan, posters,picture cues,Cards(2) - Ss preparation: books, notebooks,do homeworks. C/Procedure: I. Organization: (1m) Greeting & Check attendance II. Checking up: (5ms) nine -T asks S1 to write vocabulary on board. eight - T asks other Ss to write numbers: network Numb three * Keys: + vocabulary of last lesson. ers 0-15 + Numbers: one, two,three, four one - T corrects and gives marks. III.New lesson: eleven () Teacher/ s activities 1.Presentation (10ms) + Pre teach: Present numbers: Sixteen: 16 / Seventeen: 17 Eighteen: 18 / Nineteen: 19 / Twenty: 20 - Retell the numbers from 0 to 15. +Checking: Slap the boarb. * C3(P18): + Presentation: -T sets the scene: Nga & Lan meet their teacher, Mrs Hoa.Ba meets Phong 1st time. - Ss listen to the dialogue and read silently. T helps Ss practise dialogue : T-S; Ss-Ss; pairs -T gives instructions. Teacher contrast with How are you? *Model sentence: How old are you? I am (12) years old -T concept check meaning, form 2.Practice:(20ms) a)Pelmanism:- T. runs through the cards. -T finds out the winner. A B C D E Sixteen Seventeen Eighteen Nineteen Twenty a b c d e 16 17 18 19 20 8 T Students/ activities

Listen and repeat in chorus and 10 works individially Copy down

Work individially -Go to the boarb and write down

20 -Ss play the game with two teams. - Translate in to Vietnamese . -Work in pairs -Work in group to find the words with the number -Work in pairs to ask and answer the questions

* Practice: - Word cue drill. 8 T runs through the cues. -Write the number after listening. 16 17 18 19 20 -Work in individially -T models: T: How old are you? S: Im /12/ - Listen and repeat in chorus. -T helps Ss practise speaking :T-Ss;Ss-Ss;pairs... 3.Further practice:(6ms:) *C5 P. 19 -T guides Ss to play: bingo(Number 0-20) 4 Teacher reads : 10, 7, 19, 20, 6/ 8, 11,13, 15, 0/ 16, 12, 1, 17, 3/ 5,4,2,18,15/ .. - Ss practise speaking: half- hafl; pairs, T-Ss -T finds out the winner. -Let Ss draw a square with numbers: 0-20. III.Consolidation:(2ms) - T sums up the main contentsof the lesson. - Remember the numbers & ways to talk about the ages IV.Homework:(1m) -Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-20. - How to ask and answer about ages -Doing the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book) -Prepare for next lesson. ____________________________________________________________________ WEEK 2: Date of preparation : 2 / 9 / 2011 Date of teaching : 3 / 9 / 2011 Period 6 Unit 1: Greetings Lesson 5: C4 - 5 A/The aims and Objectives: I.The aims: - To help Ss use numbers from 0 to 20, give telephone numbers. - Develop 4 skills. II. The objectives: - By the end of this lesson, ss will be able to count numbers from 0 to 20 and read the telephone numbers fluently & correctly. B/Preparation: T: Lesson plan,extra board(survey), shark attack. S: Do homework, books & notebooks. C/Procedure: I.Organization(1) Greeting & Check attendance. II.Checking up + Warm up(5) - T helps Ss play : Shark attack. - T explains the rules of the game. N U M B E R - T gives a cue: This is a noun that has 6 leters. - Asks Ss guess the letters.T corrects and give answer keys. III. New lesson:

Teacher/ s activities 1.Presentation (10ms) +Checking: Slap the boarb: 6 11 9 5 7 12 20 15

T 7

Students/ activities

2.Practice:(20ms) a)Pelmanism:- T. runs through the cards. -T finds out the winner. A B C D E Sixteen Seventeen Eighteen Nineteen Twenty d c e b a 16 17 18 19 20 b)jumbled words: + ETGIH= eight + THRTENIE= thirteen +TW EELV= twelve + EELVEN=eleven + TWNETY=twenty +FOTEENUR= fourteen +S EEVN= seven +NIETENEN=nineteen -T asks Ss to rearrange the letters to make the words meaningful.T devides Ss in to 2 teams. T checks the words and finds out the winner * Guessing game: T asks Ss to write 1 number on a piece of paper.The rest of the class guess. Eg. Three? Yes/No 3.Further practice:(4ms) *Dictation and picture cue drill: - T reads the following telephone numbers, asks Ss write down. 04842689 054752590 091569742 0511854347 085571321 071837598 033632437 012541659. -T checks Ss writing by asking as follows: T: Whats your number? S: Oh-two-four -T helps Ss practise: T-WC, half half, pairs 4.Survey:-T shows a poster.

Listen and repeat in chorus and individially Copy down Work individially -Go to the boarb and write down 16

-Work in group to find the words with the number Work individially -Go to the boarb and write down

-Work in individially then play a game in 2 teams. - Copy answer keys. *Play a game: Guessing game. 1 person go to the board & the others guess the numbers. Work in pair to ask and answer the telephone number

Eg. S1: What is your number? S2: (oh-five- one-one, eight-two)

-Ss write down on their notebook. -Work individually 5 Practice read the telephone numbers.

10

Name Telephone numbers Mai 02403859077 Lan 02403828115 -Asks Ss go around, asks information & fill in the tables. * Models: S1: Whats your name? S2:My names ____ S1: Whats your telephone number? S2: 02403 859077. -T gets feedback.

-Ss go around the room and ask information. Fill in the grid Work individually.

III.Consolidation:(2ms) - Retell the main points of this lesson.( Numbers from 0 to 20,How to ask and answer the telephone numbers) IV.Homework:(2ms) -Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-20. -Doing exercises C1-7 page 8-12 in work book. -Preparing new lesson: Unit 2: A1-4. WEEK 3: Date of preparation : 4 / 9 / 2011 Date of teaching : 5 / 9 / 2011 Period 7 Unit 2: At School Lesson 1: A1-4 A/The aims and Objectives: I.The aims: - To help Ss use classroom imperative : come in/ open your book/ - Develop 4 skills. II.The objectives: - By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to use classroom imperatives correctly and fluently, understand Ts requests well.(Ts commands). *Knowledge: Classroom imperative to understand the teacher|s command s: Come in / Sit down / Stand up / Open your book /Close your book. B/ Preparation: - Ts: Lesson plan,poster, extra board(warm up) - Ss: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks. C/ Procedure: I.Organization(1) Greetings and check attendance. II.Checking up(5) T hangs a poster: a)9 5 = b) 16+2= c)4-4= d) 20-7= e) 8: 4= f) 5+3= .. (eight divide by four makes two) - T asks 2 Ss to give the results on board : S1: a,b,c / S2: d,e,f. - T corrects and give answer keys. Then gives them marks. III. New lesson: 11

Teacher/ s activities Revision: (5ms) *Noughts and crosess: 9-5 20-7 10+2 17+1 6+5 6+8 3-3 63 5+3 1.Presentation (8ms) + Pre teach: (To) come in:i vo (To) sit down:Ngi xung (To) Stand up :ng len (To) open your book :M sch ra (To) close your book: Gp sch li * Checking: R & R 2 .Presentation text: A1 P.20. - T sets the scene: At the classroom, teacher says sth to her Ss. T elicits 6 pictures & helps Ss practise these sentences. - Concept check: + Asks Ss to translate these sentences in to Vietnamese. + Use: imperatives. 3.A2(p.21) - Match and write: *Practice:- T helps Ss read 5 phrases in the box & runs through 5 pictures. - T asks Ss to match the imperatives with the pictures. - T gets feed back. +Mime drill: - T asks Ss to look at Ts actions and says:Teacher mines: * come in / sit down / Stand up / open your book / close your book +Simon sayS: A3 p.22: -T helps Ss play Simon says to practise the imperatives 4.Further practice:(7ms) *Mapped dialogue: - T elicits the dialogue & helps Ss practise dialogue: in pairs, T- WC, half-half (T sets the scene: Miss Huong & Ss are greeting one another). 12

Students/ activities 5 Play a game in two teams Then copy down answer keys

7 Listen and repeat in chorus and individially -Copy down. Come back your seat. Clap your hand 8

Work individially -Go to the boarb and write down Listen and practice

Ss translate in to Vietnamese

- Read 5 phrases in the box. - Work individually -Match the imperatives with the pictures.Work in pairs.

*Student say: come in/ sit down / Stand up open your book / close your book - Look at Ts actions then say in chorus. Ss practice the dialogue in pairs, T - WC; half half

S1: Good morning! Miss Hoa Children S2: Good morning, Miss Hoa! ..morning S1: How are you? morning. S2: We are fine. How are you? S1: Fine, thanks. Sit down How are ? S2: Yes Miss fine.How ? Fine, thanks S1: And open your books S2: Yes Miss III.Consolidation:(1m)- Retell the main points of this lesson. IV.Homework:(1m) -Ask them to learn by heart the teacher|s commands Do the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book).Prepare for next lesson. WEEK 3: Date of preparation : 6 / 9 / 2011 Date of teaching : 7 / 9 / 2011 Period 8 Unit 2: At school Lesson 3: B1,2,3 A/The aims and the objectives: I. The aims: -To helps Ss asks and answer about Where they live : where do you live? I live in/ on/ at - To help Ss practise 4 skills. II.Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to ask and answer the questions : where do you live? I live in/on correctly and fluently. B/ Preparation: - Ts: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD. - Ss: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks. C/ Procedure: I.Organization(1) Greetings and checking attendance. II.Checking up(5) - T calls 2 Ss come to the board to read aloud the alphabet. - Other gives his/her name and spell it. * keys: - A/B/C/D/E/F/G . - Whats your name? My names Lan. - How do you spell it? - L-A-N,Lan. + T corrects and gives marks. III. New lesson: (37) Teacher/ s activities T Students/ activities Presentation: Pre-teach:(5ms) 1/Vocabulary: - T elicits vocabulay. Coppy down and repeat in chorus. (to) Live: Sng (trans) (in) a house: Ngi nh - Picture (on) a street:Con ng- Draw (in ) a city:Thnh ph (trans) (at) 12 THD street (trans) *Checking:Matching: SS match the words in English 13

and the words in VietNamese Presentation dialogue: 2. B1(p23): - T sets the scene: Lan meets a school boy on a street(Nam).They are talking to each other. - Asks Ss listen to the dialogue and repeat. Let Ss practise speaking in pairs. - T selects out model sentences and write on board. Model sentences: A: Where do you live? B: I live on Tran Phu street In: a house/ a city/ Hue/ Viet nam. Concept check:meaning,form,use . * Use: Hi v tr li ni bn em or ai sinh sng. 3.Practice:(8ms) T runs through these cues: +Word cue drill: A city / HCM city / a house Ha noi / Le loi street Hung vuong street +Noughts and crossess: A house Lach Tray Trang Tien A street Da Nang A city Dong Hoi Hang Bong Hung Vuong -T models: + Where do you live? I live in a house T helps Ss practise asking & answering : Ss-Ss; T-Ss; pairs. Production: + B2(p24): T helps Ss read the sentences p.24 and asks them to learn by heart at home. + B4(p25): - T runs through the questions from a) to d). - Asks Ss to write the answer on their notebooks. - T gets feedback. a) My names .. c) I live in/on b) Im 12. d) L-a-n,Lan

-Go to the boarb and match 10 Work in pairs

Example exchange: S1: Where do you live? S2: On (Le Loi street)

Work in group to make questions and answer following Example exchange: S1: Where do you live? S2: On (Le Loi street)

9 -Ss enjoy the game. ( in 2 group) 4 Listen and repeat in chorus and individially Copy down Play agame in 2 teams

Work in group to guess the leters of the words 7

Coppy down -Work in groups of 4 or 3

III.Consolidation:(1m) Retell the main points of this lesson. - T sums up: Where do you live? I live in/ on IV.Homework:(1m) -Ask them to learn by heart the form and vocabulary 14

-Do the exercises 3 on page 12; 6 p.13 (Homework ) _______________________________________________________________________________ WEEK 3: Date of preparation : 9 / 9 / 2011 Date of teaching : 10 / 9 / 2011 Period 9 Unit 2: at school Lesson 2: B 4,5,6 A/The aims and the objectives: II. The aims - To help Ss learn the alphabet and ask ,answer about name, spell the name: Whats your name? My names / How do you spell it / your name? - Develop 4 skills. II.Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, ss will be able to ask and answer the questions to talk about name and learn the alphabet to spell names correctly and fluently. B/ Preparation: - Ts: Lesson plan,poster, word cues. - Ss: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks. C/ Procedure: I.Organization(1) Greetings and check attendance. II.Checking up(5) - T calls 2 Ss come to the board and write the classroom imperatives. -T corrects and gives marks . * keys: - Come in, sit down, stand up III. New lesson: Teacher/ s activities Revision:(2ms) Simon says the teachers command: - come in/ sit down/ Stand up/ - open your book/ close your book 1.Presentation: ( 10 ) + Pre teach(Vocabulary): - T elicits vocabulary : The ABC: - A B C D E F G -HIJKLMNOP - Q R S T U V W X Y Z. -(to) spell: nh vn - How do you spell it? Bn c th nh vn n khng? +T helps Ss read the alphabet again. 2.B4(p25): ( 23 ) - T presentation dialogue. T sets the scene: The T meets one of her Ss and ask her some questions. 15 T 2 Students/ activities Whole class do after teacher saying

7 Listen and repeat in chorus - Work individially Copy down

14 Listen and read the dialogue in pairs.

-T helps Ss read dialogue : T-WC ; pairs. - Let Ss practise the dialogue in pairs - T helps Ss select out model sentences: T: Whats your name? Lan: My names Lan. T: How do you spell it/ your name? Lan: L-A-N,Lan. -Concept check: meaning,use,form. * Use: asks and answer about name. * Form:-Whats your name? - My names + tn mnh. - How do you spell it? * Practice:Word cues drill. -T runs through word cues. Khoa Mai Lam Son Loan -T models: S1: Whats your name? S2: My names Khoa. S1: How do you spell it? S2: K-H-O-A,Khoa. -T helps Ss practise speaking : T-WC; half-half; pairs. -Asks Ss practise in pairs,ask and answer the real name. Then T gets feedback. * Production: - Let Ss listen to the ABC song.

Listen and repeat in chorus. -Listen and copy down. Work individially

Copy down on their notebooks. Work individually.

Copy down. - Practise in pairs the dialogue. 4 Ss practise in pairs. Listen to the ABC song.

III.Consolidation:(2ms) - Retell the main point of this lesson. - T sums up: ask and answer about name, how to spell names. IV.Homework:(2ms) - Ask them to learn by heart vocabulary,the alphabet song, How to ask and answer about name, then spell name. - Do the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book). - Prepare for next lesson. _______________________________________________________________________________ WEEK 4: Date of preparation : 11 / 9 / 2011 Date of teaching : 12 / 9 / 2011 Period 10 Unit 2: at school Lesson 4: C1 A/The aims and the objectives: I.The aims: -To helps Ss use This/That is in possitive statements and Y/N questions: 16

 Is this/Is that your + N ? Yes, it is./ No,it isnt. to talk about people and things at school. - To help Ss practise 4 skills. II.Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to use: This/That is and Yes/No questions: Is this/that your +N? Yes it is / No, it isnt. correctly and fluently. B/ Preparation: - Ts: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD. - Ss: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks. C/ Procedure: I.Organization(1) Greetings and checking attendance. II.Checking up(5) -T hangs a poster ( 3 questions) then asks 2 Ss to go to the board and answer the questions: a) Whats your name? b) How do you spell it? c) Where do you live? -T corrects and give marks . * Keys: a)My names ./ b) M-a-I, Mai / c) I live in/on. III. New lesson: (35) Teacher/ s activities T Students/ activities 1.Presentation:(10ms) 10 Listen and repeat in chorus +Pre teach(Vocabulary) - T elicits vocabulary on the board. and individially (a) student: hc sinh(example) Copy down (a) teacher: gio vin(example) (a) school: trng hc(example) (a) class: lp hc(example) (a) Classroom: phng hc (explain) Work in individially to match (a) desk: bn hc(Realia) the word in English with the * Check: R & R 12 words in Vietnamese 2/ C1(p.26):*Presentaion dialogue: -T sets the scene: Ba introduces about his school and his class; He is -Listen to and repeat the radio talking to Nam. Asks Ss to listen to the radio and repeat in chorus. in chorus. - work individually. - T helps Ss select out the model sentences: - Ss select out the model *a) This is my school/ father. sentences That is my desk/ mother. Work in pairs to ask and answer the questions and the *b)Is this/that your teacher/desk? word cues - Yes,it is /No, it isnt. + Concept check: meaning,form,use. -T asks Ss to translate in to vietnamese. - Copy down form on * Form: their notebook. a) Gii thiu ngi or vt gn hay xa: - Work individually. This / That + is+ my + N(s t) b) Hi on v tr li v ngi or vt gn/ xa: + Is this/ that + your + N( vt s t)? 17

Yes, it is/ No, it isnt.( isnt = is not). Work in chorus, Work in pairs + Is this/that + your + N ( ngi s t)? Yes,he/she is / No, he/she isnt. 8 3/Practice:Word cue drill: - T runs through the word cues. Copy down then practise in a) This/school ( ) b) That/class(x) pairs c)This/classroom () d) That/book(x) e)This/teacher/he() f)That/student/she(x) + T models: - This is my school. - Practise Ss to point at real things in Is this your school ? Yes,it is. and around the classroom , -That is my student. then practise as word cues. Is that your student? No,she isnt. 5 ( ruler,eraser, pen,book,..) T helps Ss practise: T-Ss; half-half;pairs. T gets feedback. Work in pair *Further Practice:(20ms):Realia drill: Tasks Ss to point at real things in and around the classroom , then practise as word cues.( ruler,eraser, pen,book,..) T goes around & helps Ss.Then T checks some pairs. Eg:T:Is this your desk? S: Yes, it is III.Consolidation:(3ms) Retell the main points of this lesson. -T sums up: gii thiu ngi/vt gn /xa;Hi on ngi/vt gn/ xa v tr li. IV.Homework:(1m) -Asking them to learn by heart the form: Is this/ that.?, & learn by hear vocabulary. -Doing the number 1, 2 p 14, 15.(Homework book) - Prepare for next leson. WEEK 4: Date of preparation : 13 / 9 / 2011 Period 11 Date of teaching : 14 / 9 / 2011 Unit 2: at school Lesson 5: C 2 C3 C4.My School A/The aims and the objectives: I.The aims: -To helps Ss use the questions: What is this/that? And answer : It is a/an + N (s t) -To help Ss develop 4 skills. II.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to use structure: Whats this/that? - Its a/an + N(s t) To talk about things in classroom.Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently. B/ Preparation: - Ts: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, real things(aclock,school bag,pencil). - Ss: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks, school things. C/ Procedure: 18

I.Organization(1) Greetings and checking attendance. II.Checking up(5) -T asks 2 Ss to go to the board to do the homework: a)this/classroom() b) That/student/ he(x) -T corrects and give marks . * Keys: a) This is my classroom. Is this your classroom? Yes, it is. b)That is my student. Is that your student? No, he isnt. III. New lesson: (35) Teacher/ s activities T Students/ activities 1.Presentation:(15ms) T elicits vocabulary on board. +Pre teach:Use pictures and realias to present vocabulary: (a) door: ca chnh/ (a) window: ca s (a) board: bng/ (a) clock: ng h (a) waster basket: Thng rc (a) school bag: cp sch (a)pencil: bt ch/ (a) pen: bt mc (a) ruler: thc k / (an) eraser: ci ty. +Checking: R & R. +Dialogue build:- T elicits dialogue. T: What is this/that? S:It is a door/an eraser.

15

10

T: How do you spell it? S:D-O-O-R? T helps Ss practise dialogue: T-Ss; half-half; pairs. Then T asks Ss to complete the missing words: this, it, is, spell. - Concept check: + Meaning: T asks Ss translate dialogue in to Vietnamese. + Form: Whats this/that? Its+a/an+N(s t) +Use: Hi v tr li v tn vt gn or xa. 2.Practice:(17ms): - T asks Ss to practise asking and answering with real things in or around class in pairs; T- Wc ; Eg: Whats this? Its a ruler. 19

- Ss practice the dialogue: T-Ss; halfhalf; pairs.

Ss to complete the missing words: this, it, is, spell. - Ss practice in pairs

*Wordsquare: -Presents the wordsquare & asks Ss to work in pairs to find out the words by circling the word. -Devides the class into two groups to practice. - Corrects & comments. 3.Further practice:(7ms) Lucky number: - Introduces the requirement & helps Ss to play the game in groups. -Corrects & comments * Questions: 1. How do you spell DESK ? 2. How do you spell CLASSROOM ? 3. LUCKY

W P E N S C E X O E D D C L R D D N E O H O A R N C S O O C S A I I K R O K E O W L R U L E R B - Play a game in 2 teams. SS must find out the words in the wordsquare - Playing the game in groups by answering the questions. -Correcting the mistakes. Playa game in two teams

Keys: 1.a/ 2.b/ 3. / 4.c/ 5.d/ 6.e/ 7. / 8.f III/Consolidation.(3ms)Asks Ss to give the questions used to talk about things in the classroom: Whats This/That ?- Its a/an. Then T asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson. IV.Homeworks: (2ms)-Study the Whats This/That ? Its a/anto talk about things in the classroom. - Learn by heart vocabulary and structures . - Do exercises in page 15-16 in workbook, ex 4 in page 10-11(VBT). - Prepare pictures of things in the house. ______________________________________________________________________________________ WEEK 4: Date of preparation : 16/ 9 / 2011 Date of teaching : 17/ 9 / 2011 Period 12 Unit 3: At home Lesson 1: A1-2. My house. A/The aims and the objectives: I.The aims: -Teach Ss Wh- questions with these/ those What are these/those? And answer : They are + N (s/es). And know about living room vocabulary, to talk about things in the house. - To help Ss develop 4 skills. II.Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to practice: Whats this/that? - Its a/an + N(s t)/ What are these/those? And answer : They are + N (s/es) And livingroom vocabulary to talk about things in the house.Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently. B/ Preparation: - Ts: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, real things(aclock,school bag,pencil), picture A1. - Ss: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks, school things. 20

C/ Procedure: I.Organization(1) Greetings and checking attendance. II.Checking up(5) -T asks 2 Ss to go to the board to do the homework: a)this/a ruler b) That/an eraser -T corrects and give marks . * Keys: a) Whats this? Its a ruler b) Whats is that? Its an eraser. III. New lesson: (35) In last lesson, We know how to ask and answer about the name of a thing. Today, we learn how to ask and answer aboutb names of things ( plural N) Teacher/ s activities T Students/ activities 1.Presentation:(8ms) 9 +Pre teach:(Vocabulary) Use pictures and realias to present vocabulary: - Listening to (a) lamp: n in ( explain ) (a)bookshelf: Gi sch( explain ) - Repeat in chorus. (a) chair: gh ta /(a)couch: gh di (visual) - work individually (an) armchair: gh bnh(c tay v 2 bn) (a) table: bn (c th dng lm bn n) - Writes the words on the Bb & checks (a) T. V: Ti vi (explain)= Television the meaning & the prounciation by (a) stool: gh u ( trans) matching the words & the pictrures. (a) stereo: radio,i (realia) *Check: matching. - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. 2/ A2(p31): * Presentaion text: This is Nam house. 9 Heres the livingroom. Hung is asking Nam about things in the livingroom. -T runs through pictures.Then elicits model sentences: T- Wc ; pairs, individually. +Model sentences: What is this?/that? It is a table What are these?/those? They are tables - concept check:meaning,form, use + Form: What are these/those? They are + N(e/es) Use : The ways to asks and answer about the name of things ( near or far) 10 * Note: This/that( singular) => These/those ( plural) 3.Practice:(10ms) 21

- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copy down on the notebook. Listen and repeat in chorus and work individially

-Practicing in two groups. Correcting the mistakes. Work in group (2 group) - Reading the text. - Correcting the pronunciation. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . Work in pairs.

+Picture drill: A1,2. P31:- T runs through picture - Copy down on the notebook. and asks Ss listento the radio. Eg: S1:What is this? - S2: It is a. Note: S1:What are those? - S2:They are . Thng thng thm s vo sau dt s - Introduces the example exchange & Hepls Ss to t, nhng dt c tn cng l: practise asking and answering about things in A1. o/x/ss/ch/sh/.. + es. Nu kt thc l *A2: T helps Ss practise using structure: f th chuyn F V+ es. -What are these? Theyare tables - What are those? They are -Ss use realia things in classroom to - Asks Ss practise: T-WC; half-half; open pairs, 7 ask and answer about the name of close pairs.( 1 St points at things in picture A2) things. - T gets feedback, corrects the mistakes. 4*Further practice: - T explains to Ss the rules of adding s/es after singular noun to make them plural nouns III. Consolidation.(2ms) T sums up: Wh- questions with (This/that) These / Those & living- room vocabulary. - Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson. IV. Homeworks: (1m) Learn by heart Wh questions with (This/that) These / Those & living- room vocabs. Learn the model dialogue by heart. - Prepare pictures of things in the house for next lesson. _______________________________________________________________________________ WEEK 5: Date of preparation : 18/ 9 / 2011 Date of teaching : 19/ 9 / 2011 Period 13 Unit 3: at home Lesson 2: A3-4-5-6. My house. A/The aims and the objectives: I.The aims: - To Help Ss use family vocabulary,possessive pronouns(tsh: your/my/his/her). Questions: Who is this? / Who is that? It is - Develop 4 skills. II.Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to use family vocabulary , then Ss practise asking and answering questions: Whos this? Whos that? Its her/ his . - Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently. B/ Preparation: - Ts: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, real things(aclock,school bag,pencil), picture A1. - Ss: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks, school things, their photographs. C/ Procedure: I.Organization(1) Greetings and checking attendance. II.Checking up(5) -T asks 2 Ss to go to the board to practise asking and answering with word cues: a)What/this?/television. c)What/that?/lamp. b)What/these?/stool. d)What/those?/bookshelf -T corrects and give marks . 22

* Keys: a) Whats this? Its a television/ b)What are these?- They are stools. c) Whats is that? Its a lamp/ d)What are those? They are bookshelves. III. New lesson: (35) * In last lesson, We learn how to ask and answer names of things.Today we learn how to ask and answer with: Who is this/that? It is Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities I. Presentation:(8ms) 1.Preteach: -T elicits vocabulary on the board . - Listening to the words. - Family: gia nh (situation) - Repeating the words in chorus & in - Father : b,ba (visual ) individual. - Mother: M, m (visual ) - Correcting the mistakes. - Sister : ch gi, em gi () - Giving the meaning & the - Brother: anh trai,em trai() pronunciation. - My -Copying the words. - His family/father/ - Her mother/brother/sister - Your *Check: mathing. - Listening to the dialogue. 2/A3(p32)(10ms): - Presentaion text: - Practicing the dialogue in chorus. T sets the scene: This is Ba.He is talking about his family members. - Practicing the dialogue in pairs. -Asks Ss listen to the radio once,then twice.Then asks -Correcting pronunciation & the them listen to and repeat the text in chorus. mistakes. a) T hangs a poster and show a grid: Ba's family * Look at the grid: Ss read the dialogue and then fill in Tn Quan h Tu Ngh nghip the grid . i - Work individually. Ba 12 Student Mai Ba Nga Mother Teacher Ha Sister 15 student Whos this/that? Lan farther Docter Its__ mother Asks Ss read the dialogue silently for details & fill in Whats _ name? the grid individually.(5) Her names_ - T gets feedback. b)Elicits the dialogue on the board: Dialogue build -Work individually then share with S1: who's this/that? - S2: It's his mother their partners. S1: What's her name? - S2: Her name's Nga -Asks Ss fill in the dialogue: his/her/mother/is. * Cocept check: Meaning,use,form. + Form: Who + is + this/that? Example Exchange: Its his/her + N(s t) S1: Who's that? What + is + his/her name? S2: That's his mother/father/sister His/Her name + is + tn. S1: What's his/her name? *II/practice(12) -Word cues drill. S2: His/her name's Nga/Ha/Lan - T runs through the cues. Nga Ha Ba Mother(35) Father(40) Brother(14) *T models :- Who is that ? Ss draw their family. 23

Its her mother -Helps Ss practise the dialogue : T-Wc ; half-half ; open S1: Who's this? pairs S2: It's my... III/ Production:(8ms) S1: What's his/her name? - Picture drill( Ss photographs) S2: His/her name's ... Asks Ss use their photos to practise speaking in pairs/groups of 4. ( as the dialogue in practice ). - T gets feedback : check some pairs. IV.Consolidation(3ms) - Asks Ss retell the main points of this lesson. - Asks Ss to explain the way to use who's this/ that?. - Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework: (1m) Ss learn by heart vocabulary and structures Whos ? - Study the possessive pronouns. - Prepare for next lesson. ________________________________________________________________________________________ WEEK 5: Date of preparation : 20 / 9 / 2011 Date of teaching : 21 / 9 / 2011 Period 14 Unit 3: at home Lesson 3: B1-2. Numbers A/The aims and the objectives: I.The aims: - To Help Ss know the way to count things using numbers from 21 to 100and Ss know how to pronounce plural nouns. - Develop Ss 4 skills. II.Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to count things using numbers from 21 to 100 and pronounce plural nouns. - Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently. B/ Preparation: - Ts: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, real things(aclock,school bag,pencil), picture A1, 3 cards: /s/; /z/;/iz/. - Ss: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks, school things. C/ Procedure: I.Organization(1) Greetings and checking attendance. II.Checking up(5) -T asks1 St to go to the board to write vocabulary and read them aloud. - Other to ask and answer the qs using card: Ba/brother, 12 -T corrects and give marks . * Keys: a) Whos this? Its her brother. Whats his name? - His names Ba. How old is he? Hes 12 years old. III. New lesson: (35) * In last lesson, We practised the qs: Whos this/that? its.. Today , We are going to learn numbers from 21 to 100 and the ways to pronounce plural nouns. 24

Teacher/ s activities 1.Presentation(10) Revision some of the numbers from 0 to 20: 0, 1, ..9/10/7/25/5/29/1/15.20 (2) * Preteach: (vocabulary) -Use the card to present voabulary: + Thirty:30 / Forty: 40 /Fifty: 50/ Sixty:60 Seventy:70/ Eight:80/ Ninety: 90. One hundred:100 + twenty-one/ twenty-two + Thirty-one/ thirty-two * check: what and where. - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. 2.Practice:(20ms) +Snakes and ladder: B1 P.35 -Gives instructions. Help Ss play a game in groups of 4. +Realia drill: B2 P.36. - Asks Ss to practise speaking(use real things around the classroom) Eg: -S1: There is one door. S2: And there are 22 desks 4.Further practice:(8ms): -T runs throught the pics in B2. Ss count things in the pictures and fill in to boxes below the picture.Then check Ss answer. +Dictation lists: T reads: Desk, rulers, benches, students, tables, books, clocks, couches, door, windows, houses, lamps - Helps Ss pronounce the plural nouns - Gives the rules of ending sounds:/s/;/z/;/iz/. + /s/ :nouns ending in: Ks,ps,ts + /iz/:nouns ending in: ches,shes,ses,ges,xes,zes. + /z/: the rest nouns. -Read the list of words: desks,rulers. - T asks Ss put the words in 3groups according to the pronunciation: -T gets feedback. IV.Consolidation:(3ms) 25

Students/ activities A= 1 B D F H I K N O P Q R S T U V W S Y Z= 26 Listen and repeat in chorus and individially Copy down

- Listening to the words. - Repeat the words in chorus. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. -Copying the words.

Work in groups of 4 Work in pairs - Play agame in table S1: There one door S2: And there are 22 desks -Work in pairs

-Work in individially Students write: /s/ /z/ desks Students Books Clocks lamps Rulers Tables Doors Windows /iz/ Benches Couches Houses

- Retel the main points of this lesson. - Asks Ss to give the pronunciation of plural nouns (/s/, /z/, /iz/ ). - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework:(1m) - Study the pronunciation of plural nouns (/s/, /z/, /iz/ ). - Learn by heart the numbers from 21 to 100 and write detail: Twenty- one; twenty two - Exercise: 1 & 2 .P 21. Workbook. - Prepare the school aids such as: ruler, pencil, pen _______________________________________________________________________________ WEEK 5 Date of preparing: 23/9/2011 - Date of teaching: 24/ 09/ 2011. Period 15 Unit 3: at home Lesson 4: B3-B4-B5-B6. Numbers. A/The aims and the objectives: I.The aims: - To Help Ss make questions about quantities using: How many+ N(s/es)+ are there? and further practise numbers to talk about things in the classroom, livingroom and family. - Develop Ss 4 skills. II.Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to use questions and answers with How many..?.Ss use numbers to talk about things around them fluently. - Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently. B/ Preparation: - Ts: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, pictures. - Ss: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks,pictures. C/ Procedure: I.Organization(1) Greetings and checking attendance. II.Checking up(5) -T asks Ss to make 5 sentences using: There is/are + s lng + N(s/es). -T corrects, remarks and give marks . * Keys: - There is one book./There are 5 coaches./ There is III. New lesson: (35) * In last lesson, We learned how to make sentences with: There is/are+ quantities+ N(s/es). Now we are going to learn the way to make questions and answer with How many + N(s/es)+are there?- There is/are.. Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities *.Revision (5ms)+Chain game: B2 P.36 Students use the information they have filled in B2P.36 to describe their classroom to check the form There is. There are.. Work in individially Example:- S1: There is one door S2: There are one door and six windows S3:...... 1.Presentation:(10ms) - Listen and repeat in chorus. +Preteach(vocabulary): T elicits vocabulary and write on - Copy down . 26

the bb. - Work individually -(a) bookcase = (a) bookshelf (synanym). - How many?Bao nhiu..? (trans) People(n) ngi. -Listen and repeat in chorus and *check: R & R individially 2/Presentation text: B3 P.37 - Ask and answer about quantities. -Dialogue build,point at real things to elicit the dialogue . Help Ss read dialogue - Reading the dialogue in individual. -Correcting the pronunciation. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. - Asks Ss to read the text in individual. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. -Present the text by T reads the model and gives the structures and gives the new structure +Model sentences: -Ss fill in the blanks: many/are Nam:How many doors are there ? /there/is. benches Copy down Lan: There is one in my family are eight - Repeating in chorus & in - Concept check meaning,form.. individual. *Form: How many+N(s/es)+ are there? There are/ is+ Number+ n - Gives the usage(by Vietnamese) 3.Practice:(20ms) - Making sentences for the next cues. +Picture drill:(B2 P.36 & B5 P.37) T runs through - Practicing in groups & in pairs . pictures.Help Ss practise speaking:T-WC/half-half - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to - Correcting the pronunciation. practice. Ex: - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. S1: How many desk are there ? 4.Production:(7ms)- T elicits the table S2: There are six? +S urvey: Copy the survey on the board and make up Ss to make sentences for the next. the questions: S1: How many people are there in your family? S2: There are .. Nam In your In your house? In your classroom? e family? people Chair lamps tables desks windows students s Ba 3 IV.Consolidation:(1m) - Asks Ss to give the questions & the numbers to talk about things in the classroom, the living-room & 27

the family. How to ask and answer about quantities. S1: How many doors/desks are there ? S2: There is one/ There are [two] - Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson. IV.Homework:(1m) - Learn by heart How manyare there ? questions & the exchange. - Exercise: 3 & 4. P 22. Workbook. - Prepare the picture on page 38.

WEEK 6: Date of preparing: 25/9/2010 - Date of teaching: 26/ 09/ 2010. Period 16 Unit 3: at home Lesson 5: C1-2-4. A/The aims and the objectives: I.The aims: - To Help Ss read a text for details and talk about jobs. - Develop Ss 4 skills. II.Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text about Lans family, Ss will be able to ask and answer questions about jobs. - Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently, especially reading skill. B/ Preparation: - Ts: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, pictures. - Ss: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks,pictures. C/ Procedure: I.Organization(1) Greetings and checking attendance. II.Checking up(5) a)Questions: -T shows the picture of C1(38) and asks Ss to answer the Qs. 1.How many tables are there?/.2.How many armchairs are there? 3.How ? / 4.How many people ? * Keys: 1. There is one. 3.There are two 2.There is one. 4. There are four. - T corrects and give marks. III. New lesson: (35) In last lesson, We learned the way to make questions and answer with How many + N(s/es)+are there?- There is/are... Today, we are going read the text about Lans family. Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities *Revision(3ms) +Write it up: From survey lesson 4 Ask students to talk : There are/ is...... - Listening to the words. 28

1.Pre- reading:(12ms) +Pre teach(Vocabulary): (an) engineer(picture): k s (a) doctor (picture):bc s (a) nurse (picture):Y t - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. -Introduces the requirement (luat)& ask Ss to work in individual to find out the jobs. -Asks Ss to compare in pairs. -Asks Ss to give the information. -Corrects & comments. 2/C1(p38): a)Open prediction:Asks Ss look at the picture C1 & guess information to fill in the table: Lan|s family How old..? What does he/she do? Father 40 an engineer Mother 35 a teacher Brother 8 a student Lan - T gets feedback. 3.While reading(20ms) Asks Ss listen to the disc Asks students to read C1 P.38 to check their predictions. +Noughts and crosses: T asks questions from a) to h) in C1 P.38 b) Comprehension questions: -Asks Ss read the text again & answer the Qs in pairs. -Gets feedback Eg: a)How many books are there in Lan|s living room? - There are four people in her family c) Hi v tr li v ngh nghip: *T models: + What does he/she do? - He/she is a teacher/an engineer. + What do you/they do? - Im a student / They are students 29

- Repeat in chorus then in individual. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. -Copying the words.

- Working in individual to find out the jobs & comparing in pairs. - Giving the information & correcting.

Working in pairs to guess about Lans family: How old.....? What does he/ she do? Reading C1 P.38 to check their predictions Working in groups to ask and anwer the question in C1 P.38 - Repeat in chorus then in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. Play agame: noughts and crosses. a d g b e h c f i

- Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation. * Keys: b) He is forty. c) He is an engineer d) She is thirty five e) She is a teacher f) He is eight g) Hes a student h) They are in the livingroom.

*.Post reading:(7ms) Talk about songs family. *Eg: This is songs family.There are four +Word cue drill: C2 P.39. people in his family: his father;his (T runs through the family as C1). mother;his sister and him. - Asks Ss look at the family tree(p39). This is his father. Hes a doctor.Hes forty - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to two years old.This is his mother. Shes a practice. nurse.Shes thirty nine.His sister is - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to fifteen.Shes a student. repeat in chorus - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. -Ss to make sentences for the next - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. Ss transform the sentences in C1.P.38 with +Transformation writing the information in C2P.39 to write about Song|s family IV.Consolidation:(1m) How to introduce about someones family. How to ask and answer about jobs. Check the form : How many......? - There is/are.... V.Homework:(1m) - Learn by heart cabulary & structures of this lesson. - Do the exercse 3 P.22 in workbook. - Prepare for next lesson. ******************************************************************************* WEEK 6: Date of preparing: 27/9/2011 - Date of teaching: 28 / 09/ 2011. Period 17 Grammar practice A/The aims and the objectives: I.The aims:- To Help Ss further practise the uses of To be ,imperative,numbers, question words, There is/There are and furniture vocabulary. - Develop Ss 4 skills. II.Objectives:- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to use to be, imperative, numbers from 0 to 100, Qs words( What / Where/ How/ How many),There is/There are and furniture vocabulary. - Read and understand the text about Lans family, Ss will be able to ask and answer questions about jobs. - Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently, especially reading skill. B/ Preparation: Ts: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, pictures. Ss: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks,pictures. C/ Procedure: I.Organization(1) Greetings and checking attendance. II.Checking up(5) - T calls 2 Ss to read the introduction of songs famly.(may be sing that song).30

Then T corrects and gives marks. III. New lesson: (35) Teacher/ s activities 1.Grammar: *TO BE:(7ms) +Gap fill: Grammar practice 1-3 P.40 - Retell the forms of theVerbs : "To be *Subjects: I/we/you/they/he/she/it *To be: am/ is/ are. 2/Exercises: * word cues drill: *Ex1-3(40) T helps Ss do exercise - T gets feedback. - T explain and model: They are teachers. They/teachers ; We/student ; She/ a nurse He/ an engineer ; I/ a student ; They/ sister You/12 ; We/brother ; She/ a doctor -Introduces the game & helps Ss to play in two groups by choosing the cue & making question. -Corrects & comments the game. *IMPERATIVE:(10ms)- Asks S look at the picture(p41) and answer the question in pairs. +Gap fill: Grammar practice 4 P.40 -Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work in individual to fill in the gaps. -Asks Ss to compare in pairs. -Asks Ss to give the information. -Corrects & comments. +Simon says *Question word:(10ms) +Gap fill: Grammar practice 6 P.41. Retell the questions words theyve learned * Answer keys: Song|s a student and he is 12. There are 4 people in Song|s family : his farther, his mother, his sister and him. His farther is name is Kien.He is 42 and he is a doctor. His mother|s name is Oanh. she is 39 years old and she is a nurse. His siter|s name is Lan. She is 15 and she is a student. *Ex7(42)- Asks Ss to write the words for the numbers & write the numbers for the words. - Asks them to make questions for answer given: a.12 b.4 c.Kien d.42 e.a doctor f.Oanh g.39 h.a nurse i.Lan J.a student *Numbers:(5ms) +Bingo: T reads: seventeen, seventy, eleven, one hundred, thirty, sixteen, forty, fourteen, three, nineteen....... *Furniture:(10ms) Elicits the picture quiz 31

Students/ activities

Answer keys: 1./ am am are is are. 2./ am is is are are. 3./ a) are am; b) is is. c) is isnt ; d) are arent. - Work individually. - Work in group to make sentences with To be. - Working in individual to fill in the gaps. -Comparing in information. pairs & giving the

4/Answer keys: a) come in ; b) sit down. c) open your book ; e) stand up. d) close your book. *Answer keys: a) What - is ; b) Do - live. c) Who - is ; d) What - is. Work in individially +Anwers key: 1.How old is Song? 2.How many poeple are there in his family? 3.What is his farther|s name? 4.What does he do? 5.What is his mother|s name? 6.How old is she? 7.what does do? 8.What is his sister|s name? 9.What does she do? T- whole class SS choose 9 numbers Work in groups

+Crossword Puzzle: - T explains how to play a game.Grammar practice 10 P.43. Asks Ss fill in the Work in pairs: picture quiz in group of 4. SSdraw their own pictures of furniture on +Guessing game: example exchange: scrap of paper and ask following the S1: Is it a TV?/ S2: No, it is not example exchange S3:Is it a chair?/ S2: Yes, it is (Repeat) +T/F repetition drill: picture B5 P.37 (Silent) There is a TV./ There are 3 stools (Repeat) There are 4 people (Repeat) There are 2 armchairs and 2 chairs (Silent) There are 7 books./ There are 2 lamps (Silent) There is a lamp./ (Repeat) There is a steeo and a telephone (Repeat IV.Consolidation:(2ms)- T sums up the main contents of this lesson - Check the form : How many......?/ There is/are.... V.Homework:(1m) - Complete all the exercises 1 10(p 40-43). Review from Unit 1 to Unit 3. Prepare to do a test of next lesson. _______________________________________________________________________________ WEEK 6: Date of preparing: 30/9/2011 - Date of teaching: 01/ 10/ 2011. Period 18 Written test (45) English 6. No 1 A/The aims and the objectives: I.The aims:- To Help Ss have a chance to test their knowledge of English in units1,2,3. II.Objectives: - By the end of the test, ss will be able to know their knowledge about units 1,2,3. B/ Preparation: Ts: Lesson plan,paper tests. Ss: Do the homeworks, pens and some school things C/ Procedure: I.Organization(1) Greetings and checking attendance. II.Checking up III/ The contents of the test I.C hoose the best answer : a, b,c or d? (2,5M) 1.This is my.......................... a.hello b.hi c.family d.fine 2.We are in the ............................. a.living room b.window c.table d.door 3.There are four.................in my family: my father, my mother, my brother and I. a.dogs b.people c.window d.chairs 4. My mother is thirty-five....................old. a.year b.years c.age d.ages 5. She is a................... a.doctors b.engeneer c.teachers d.student 6. We.........................on Tran Hung Dao street.. 32

a.address b.is c.live 7. ........................are you? I am fine, thanks. a.Where b.what c.How d.Who 8. Is this .................... friend? -Yes, hes my friend. a.his b.her c.my 9. This is.................eraser ? a. on b. an c. a 10. What is your......................? -My name is Lan. a.name b.student c.teacher III.Match the pairs of sentences (1,5M) A 1.What is this? 2.Are these your pens? 3.Is that your house? 4.Who is that? 5.Where do you live? 6. Is this your ruler? B a. Yes,it is. b. Its a book. c.I live on Tran Phu street. d. No, it isnt. Its his ruler e. No, there arent. f. Thats Mai

d.are

d.your d.in d.friend

III. Write the dialogues in the correct order. (3ms) Children: Were fine, thank you. How are you? Miss Hoan: Good afternoon, children. Children: Bye. Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye. Children: Good afternoon, Miss Hoan. Miss Hoan: How are you today? Children: .......................................................................... Miss Hoan: ......................................................................... Children: .......................................................................... Miss Hoan: ........................................................................ Children: ......................................................................... Miss Hoan: ....................................................................... II.Write the words for the numbers. ( 1 M ) a. 15 = ......................................; c. 28 = ............................................. b. 30 = .......................................; d. 59 = ........................................... V.Put the words in the corects order. (2ms) 1. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /. .......................................................................................... 2 . / my / this /teacher / is / . ......................................................................................... 3. / an / he / engineer / is /. ........................................................................................... 4. /name/ her/ is / Nga/. .......................................................................................... THE END 33

I.Choose the best answer : a, b,c or d? (2,5M) 1.c Key 1.How many peolpe are ............................? 1:......... a.this b.that c.there d.they 2.We are ..................... the living room. 2:......... a.in b.on c.at d.into 3.There ......... four peolpe in my family: my father, my mother, my brother and I.3:........ a.is b.are c.am d.does 4. ......................is that? - That is Lan. 4:......... a.Where b.what c.How d.Who 5. She is a................... 5:......... a.doctors b.engeneer c.teachers d.student 6. We.........................on Tran Hung Dao street.. 6:........ a.lives b.is c.live d.are 7. ........................are you? I am fine, thanks.7:........ a.Where b.what c.How d.Who 8. Is this .................... friend? -Yes, hes my friend. 8:......... a.his b.her c.my d.your 9. This is.................eraser 9:......... a. on b. an c. a d.in 10. What .........your name? -My name is Lan. 10:....... a.is b.are c.am d.does II.Match the pairs of sentences (1,5M) A B 1.What is this? a. Yes,it is. 2.Are these your pens? b. Its a book. 3.Is that your house? c.I live on Tran Phu street. 4.Who is that? d. No, it isnt. Its his ruler 34

Answer:

2.a 3.b

4.d 5.d

6.c

7.c 8.a

9.b

10.a

Key: 1:......b........ 2:...........e...... 3:..........a........ 4:........f.......... 5:............c...... 6:..........d......

5.Where do you live? e. No, they arent. 6. Is this your ruler? f. Thats Mai III.Write the words for the numbers. ( 1 M ) a. 15 = ......................................; c. 28 = ............................................. b. 30 = .......................................; d. 59 = ........................................... III. Write the dialogues in the correct order. (1m) Children: Were fine, thank you. How are you? Miss Hoan: Good afternoon, children. Children: Bye. Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye. Children: Good afternoon, Miss Hoan. Miss Hoan: How are you today? IV. Read. Then write the answer.(2ms) I am Nam. This is my family. We are in our yard. There are five people in my family: my father, my mother, my brother, my sister and me. My father is forty-two. He is a doctor. My mother is thirty-nine. She is a nurse. My brother is ten. My sister is twelve. They are students. 1. How many people are there in his family? 2.How old is his father? 3.what does he do? 4what does his mother do? VI.Put the words in the corects order. (2ms) 1. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /. ............................................................ 2 . / my / this /teacher / is / . ............................................................ 3. / an / he / engineer / is /. ........................................................... 4. /name/ her/ is / Nga/. ............................................................ THE END

a.fifteen b.twenty-eight c.thirty d.fifty-nine => Miss Hoan: Good afternoon, children. Children: Good afternoon, Miss Hoan. Miss Hoan: How are you today? Children: Were fine, thank you. How are you? Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye. Children: Bye.

1There are five people in my family. 2.He is forty-two. 3. He is a doctor. 4.She is a nurse. 1.How many people are there? 2.This is my teacher. 3.He is an engeneer 4.Her name is Nga.

35

WEEK 7: Date of preparing: 02/10 /2011 - Date of teaching: 03/ 10/ 2011. Period 19 Unit 4: big or small Lesson: 1:Where is your school?A 1-2 A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson, ss are able to practice Yes/ No question to use possessive by reading a decription of a scchool I.Knowledge: Reading a desciption of a school with practice in possessive s to talk about possessions II.Skill: Reading B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting (1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Not check III.New lesson: Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities 1.Pre reading:(12ms) +Pelmanism: Work in group I Thu He You She

His

My

Your

Her

Thu|s

+Pre teach: Big:(realia) To, ln Small: :(realia) Nh, b In the city(Picture): thnh ph In the country: (Picture) nng thn +Checking: ROR +Predict: Matching Big Phong|s school small In the city

Listen and repeat in chorus and individially Copy down Work in individially T- whole class (to predict )

In the city Thu|s school +Model sentences: S1:Is Phong|s school small? S2:Yes, it is S1:Is Thu|s school small? S2:No, it is not 2.While reading:(20ms)

Listen and repeat in chorus and individially Copy down

Work in groups 36

+A1 P.44 Ask them to correct their predictions +Comprehension question: A2 P.44 a-d

Read the text and check their preditions Work in groups(Answer the questions in A2 P.44 from a to d

3.Post reading(8ms) +Yes/ no questions answer drill: Phong|s school Thu|s school Your school Big/ small? Your brother|s school In the city/ country? Your sister|s school

Work in groups

VI.Consolidation:(2ms) -Check the vocab V.Homework:(2ms) Do the numbers 1P.35/3.36 _________________________________________________________________________ WEEK 7: Date of preparing: 05/10/2011 - Date of teaching: 06/ 10/ 2011. Period 20 Unit 4: big or small Lesson: 1:Where is your school?A 3-4-5-6 A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson, ss are able to know more about numbers and school vocabulary I.Knowledge: Reading a text about school to understand details and get further practice in numbers and school vocabaly II.Skill: Reading B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Check the form of yes/no questions III.New lesson: Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities 1.Revision:(4ms) +Bingo: Elicit and list numbers on the board:2, 5, 8,100, SS choose 5 numbers from the board 200,400,32,54,600, 900, 10 -T reads: 200, 5, 8,32,54,900 2.Pre reading:(5ms) +Open prediction: Work in group 37

Asks them to guess what these numbers are about , to do with school: 400, 900,8, 20 EX student, teacher, desks, window... 3.While reading:(25ms) -Asks ss to read the text A3P.45 to correct their prediction +Answer given: 1.In the country 2.8 3.400 4.In the city 5.No, it is not. It is big 6.20 7.900 -Asks them to make question with these answer *Answer key: 1.Where is Phong|s school? 2.How many classrooms are there in Phong|s school? 3. How many students are there in Phuong|s school? 4.Where is Thu|s school? 5.Is it small? 6.How many classrooms are there in Thu|s school? 7.How many students are there in Thu|s school? 4.Post reading:(7ms) A4 P.46 +Transformation writing: Depending on whether ss live in the city or the country, ss take on of the texts in A3P.45 and rewrite it according to their own school Read the text and check their predition(Work in individially )

Work in groups to make question for the answer given

Work in individially III.Consolidation:(2ms) Check the form school vocabuly IV.Homework:(1m) Do numbers 4P.37/ 5P.38 WEEK 7: Date of preparing: 07 / 10 / 2011 - Date of teaching: 08 / 10 / 2011. Period 21 38

Unit 4: big or small Lesson: 3: MY CLASS -B1-2-3-4-5-6 -P.47-48 A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson, ss are able to Listen to a dialogue about school to understand the details; practising cardinal numbers, ordinal numbers and Which question to talk about school. I.Knowledge: To practice the question : 1.Which class are you in ? I am in class 6A 2.Which grade are you in ? I am in grade 6 II.Skill: -Listening B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Check the form of yes/no questions III.New lesson: Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities 1.Pre listening:(13ms) +Pre teach: And:(Translation) :V Listen and repeat in chorus and individially The first floor:(Picture):Tng 1 Copy down The sixth floor:(Picture):Tng 6 +ROR: The first= 1st Work in group The second=2nd rd The third= 3 The fourth= 4th The fifth= 5th The sixth= 6th The seventh= 7th The eighth= 8th The nineth= 9th The tenth= 10th Work in groups +Predict dialogue: Thu: Hello, which grade are you in? Phong:Iam in grade.................... Thu: And which class are you in? Phong:......................What about you? Thu: Iam in grade.......,class............. How many floors does your school have? Phong:...........................It is asmall school. Thu: My school has ..............floors and my classroom is on the ........floor. Where is your classroom? Phong: It is on the......floor. -Ss listen and check their predictions. 2.While listening:(20ms) -Asks ss to listen the text B1 P.47 to correct their 39

predictions +Grid: B2 P.48 3.Post listening:(8ms) +Board drill: Grade Thu Phong You 6 7 Class 7C 6A Floor 2nd 1st

Ss work in pairs Example exchange: S1: Which grade is Thu in? S2:She is in grade 6 S1: Which class is Thu in? S2:She is in class 6A S1:Where is her classroom? S2:It is on the first floor.

IV.Consolidation:(2ms) Check the cardinal numbers, ordinal numbers and Which question to talk about school V.Homework:(1m) Do numbers all exercises in part B ( workbook) WEEK 6: Date of preparing: 9 / 10 /2011 - Date of teaching: 10/ 10 / 2011. Period : 22 Unit 4: big or small Lesson: 4: Getting ready for school C1-2-3 A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson, ss are able to practice Simple present tense, positive statements with I and vocabulary of routines to talk about habitual actions I.Knowledge: Present vocabulary of rountines , practice the form: What do you do every morning? I........................ II.Skill: Speaking B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Check the form of yes/no questions III.New lesson: Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities 1.Presentation:(13ms) +Pre teach:Use the pictures on p.49 (to)get up: Thc dy (to)Get dressed:Mc qun o (to)brush your teethnh rng (to)wash your face:Ra mt (to)have breakfast:n sng (to)go to school:i hc 40

- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words +Checking:Slap the board Thc dy Ra mt Mc qun o n sng nh rng i hc

- Repeat the words in chorus & in individual. - Give the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copy the words Correcting the mistakes.

Listen and repeat in chorus and individially Copy down

- Read the dialogue in individual. -Correct the pronunciation.

+Presentation text: C1.P.49 +Model sentences: What do you do every morning? Get up I brush my teeth Have breakfast +Model sentences: S1:What does Ba/ He/ She do every morning? S2:Ba gets up brushes Has goes at 6 oclock his teeth breakfast to school

Work in pairs to practice the form: Work in pairs to practice the model sentences: What does Ba/ He/ She do every morning? Ba gets up at 6 oclock

2.Practice:(20ms) a.Word cue drill: following the example exchange: S1:What do you do every morning? S2:I get up S2:What do you do then? S1:...... .............up ............teeth .................dressed ............face

EX: S1:What do you do every morning? S2:I get up S2:What do you do then? -Ss work in group of 7.

.........breakfast ...........school - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in 41

- Repeat in chorus & in individual. - Make sentences for the next cues. - Practice in groups & in pairs . -Correct the pronunciation.

groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. b.Write it up: C3 P.49 +Write 5 sentences about what YOU do every morning. Begin with: Every morning, I get up. Then I............ 3.Further practice:(8ms) +Chain game: S1:I get up S2: I get up and brush my teeth S3: I get up, brush my teeth and I get dressed S4:..................

-Work in pairs to practice the exchange - Play in pairs & correcting the mistakes

III.Consolidation:( 2 ms) Check the model sentences - Asks Ss to give the questions & answer to talk about routines. - What does Ba / he / she do every morning ? - Ba gets up. He has breakfast. She brushes my teeth. goes to school. - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. IV.Homework:(1m) - Study the exchange. - Exercise: write about your family members routines. - Prepare the picture on page 50 & the clock. WEEK 8: Date of preparing: 10/9/2011 - Date of teaching: 11/ 10/ 2011. Period : 23 Unit 4: big or small Lesson: 5: Getting ready for school C 4-5-6-7-8 A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson ss will be able to tell the time I.Knowledge: Telling the time S1: What time is it? S2:It is eight oclock. ten fifteen. half past ten. II.Skill: Speaking B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Check vocabulary of routines III.New lesson: 42

Teacher/ s activities 1.Presentation:(13ms) +Number dictation: T reads: one ten, fourty thirty, five twenty, three fifteen, six forty, seven forty five, ten thrirty, twelve twenty five, eleven fifty, two fifty five +Pre teach: The time: thi gian Ten oclock: 10 gi ng half past ten: 10 gi 30 pht (to) be late for: Mun We are late for school - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. +Checking: What and where The time half past ten Ten oclock (to) be late for

Students/ activities

Work in individially

Listen and repeat in chorus and individially Copy down

- Repeat the words in chorus & in individual. - Give the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copy the words Correcting the mistakes

Work in groups

Listen and repeat in chorus and individially

+Presentation picture : C4-5 P.50 +Model sentenses: S1: What time is it? S2:It is eight oclock. ten fifteen. half past ten. 2.Practice:(20ms) +Picture/Realia drill: Following the example exchange: S1: What time is it? S2:It is eight oclock. +Word cue drill: C7 P.51 Get up Have breakfast Go to school Go home

Work in pairs to practice example exchange: S1: What time is it? S2:It is eight oclock. ten fifteen. half past ten. - Repeat in chorus & in individual. - Make sentences for the next cues. - Practice in groups & in pairs . -Correct the pronunciation. Work in pairs to practice S1:What time do you get up? S2:At/ six o|clock/ 43

Following the example exchange: S1:What time do you get up? S2:At/ six o|clock/ 3.Further practice:(8ms) +Noughts and crosses:

6.10 7.00

6.30 11.00

4.45 11.30

Work in groups to ask and answer the questions about the time

3.15 4.20 5.30 III.Consolidation:(2ms) Check the model sentences Asks Ss to give the questions & answer to talk about the ti - What time is it ? - Its ten oclock.. ten fifteen. half past ten - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. IV.Homework:(1m) - Study the model exchange. - Exercise: write about your family members routines. - Prepare the picture on page 52 & the things you usually do in a day. -Do number 3 P.41/4 P.42 WEEK 6: Date of preparing: 12/10 /2011 - Date of teaching: 13/ 10 / 2011. Period :24 Tr bi kim tra 1 tit Time: 45 minutes A.Objectives: I.Knowledge: -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text. II.Skill: Writing B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting -Check attendence II.Checking: -Not check Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities I.Choose the best answer : a, b,c or d? (2,5M) Answer: 1.c Key 1.How many peolpe are ............................? 1:......... 2.a a.this b.that c.there d.they 2.We are ..................... the living room. 2:......... 3.b a.in b.on c.at d.into 3.There ......... four peolpe in my family: my father, my mother, my brother and I.3:........ 4.d a.is b.are 44

c.am d.does 4. ......................is that? - That is Lan. 4:......... a.Where b.what c.How d.Who 5. She is a................... 5:......... a.doctors b.engeneer c.teachers d.student 6. We.........................on Tran Hung Dao street.. 6:........ a.lives b.is c.live d.are 7. ........................are you? I am fine, thanks.7:........ a.Where b.what c.How d.Who 8. Is this .................... friend? -Yes, hes my friend. 8:......... a.his b.her c.my d.your 9. This is.................eraser 9:......... a. on b. an c. a d.in 10. What .........your name? -My name is Lan. 10:....... a.is b.are c.am d.does II.Match the pairs of sentences (1,5M) A B 1.What is this? a. Yes,it is. 2.Are these your pens? b. Its a book. 3.Is that your house? c.I live on Tran Phu street. 4.Who is that? d. No, it isnt. Its his ruler 5.Where do you live? e. No, they arent. 6. Is this your ruler? f. Thats Mai III.Write the words for the numbers. ( 1 M ) a. 15 = ......................................; c. 28 = ............................................. b. 30 = .......................................; d. 59 = ........................................... III. Write the dialogues in the correct order. (1m) Children: Were fine, thank you. How are you? Miss Hoan: Good afternoon, children. Children: Bye. Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye. Children: Good afternoon, Miss Hoan. Miss Hoan: How are you today? IV. Read. Then write the answer.(2ms) 45

5.d

6.c

7.c 8.a

9.b

10.a

Key: 1:......b........ 2:...........e...... 3:..........a........ 4:........f.......... 5:............c...... 6:..........d......

a.fifteen b.twenty-eight c.thirty d.fifty-nine => Miss Hoan: Good afternoon, children. Children: Good afternoon, Miss Hoan. Miss Hoan: How are you today? Children: Were fine, thank you. How are you? Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye. Children: Bye.

I am Nam. This is my family. We are in our yard. There are five people in my family: my father, my mother, my brother, my sister and me. My father is forty-two. He is a doctor. My mother is thirty-nine. She is a nurse. My brother is ten. My sister is twelve. They are students. 1. How many people are there in his family? 2.How old is his father? 3.what does he do? 4what does his mother do? VI.Put the words in the corects order. (2ms) 1. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /. ............................................................ 2 . / my / this /teacher / is / . ............................................................ 3. / an / he / engineer / is /. ........................................................... 4. /name/ her/ is / Nga/. ............................................................ THE END IV.Homework: -Prepare new lesson: Unit 1: A1-2

1There are five people in my family. 2.He is forty-two. 3. He is a doctor. 4.She is a nurse. 1.How many people are there? 2.This is my teacher. 3.He is an engeneer 4.Her name is Nga.

WEEK 9: Date of preparing: 16/9/2011 - Date of teaching: 17/ 10/ 2011. Period : 25 Unit 5: things i do Lesson: 1: My day (A1-2) Period: 25 A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson ss will be able to use the simple present tense with I/ he/ she to talk about daily routines I.Knowledge: Present vocabulary , talking about the work of everyday Every day I get up at six I brush my teeth I wash my face I get dressed I have breakfast II.Skill: Speaking and reading B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Check the way to tell time III.New lesson: 46

Teacher/ s activities 1.Revision:(3ms) +Guessing game: SS choose a time and complete the sentence: It is ............nine fifteen......... Example: S1:Is it half past eight? S2: No, it is not S1:Is it nine fifteen? S2:Yes it is 2.Presentation:(15ms) +Pre teach: (to) do your homework: Lm bi tp (to) play games: Chi tr chi - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. +Checking: Slap the board: go to school do your homework play games Have breakfast Get dressed +Presentation text: A1 P.52: - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. - Asks Ss to read the text in individual. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. Every day I go to school. She goes

Students/ activities

Work in individially

Listen and repeat in chorus and individially Copy down

-Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. -Copying the words & Correcting the pronunciation.

- Reading the dialogue in individual. -Correcting the pronunciation. *Model sentence: Everyday I go to school. she goes

+Comprehension questions: -Working in pairs to answer. Then giving A2 P.53 a-d the keys. -Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in Answer: pairs to answer. Then give the keys. 1./ Everyday she gats up . -Corrects & comments. 2./ Everyday morning she goes to school. Questions: 3./ Everyday afternoon she plays games. 1./ What does Nga do everyday ? 4./ Everyday evening she does her 2./ What does she do everyday morning? homeworks. 3./ What does she do everyday afternoon? 4./ What does she do everyday evening? Listen and repeat in chorus and individially Copy down 47

+Pre teach: (to) listen to music:(picture): Nghe nhc (to) watch T.V: :(picture) xem ti vi (to) do the housework: :(picture) Lm cng vic nh (to) read: :(picture): c +Checking: Matching +Ordering vocabulary: T reads: Every morning, Lan gets up and listen to music. every afternoon she comes home and does the housework. then she washes T.V . Every evening she reads and does her homework +Presentation text: A3 P.53: - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. - Asks Ss to read the text in individual. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments

- Copying down the words listening to the sentences & take note the right order. - Checking & correcting Answer keys: 1..(to) listen to music; 3. (to) watch TV; 2.(to) do the houseworks; 4.(to) read - Reading the dialogue in individual. -Correcting the pronunciation. *Model sentence: - What does Ba do after school ? He watches TV.

- Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs 3.Practice:(15ms) +Substitution drill: - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in Students : groups & in pairs . Every day Nga gets up at 6 -Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments She brushes her teeth Teacher : She washes her face Every day I get up at six ................ I brush my teeth I wash my face ................ I get dressed I have breakfast I go to school I play games I do my homework. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . +Picture drill: A3 P.53 - Correcting the pronunciation. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. Model sentence: - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to - What does [Ba / Lan] do after school ? repeat in chorus & in individual. [ He/She] watches TV. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . 48

-Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments 3.Production:(8ms) +Survey: S1: What time do you get up? S2: 5.30 Name Get up Have breakfast

Play game 4.30

Do your home work 7.00

Vien 5.30 6.15 ..... ..... III.Consolidation:(2ms) -Asks Ss to give the model sentence used to talk about daily routine Everyday I go to school. she goes -Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. Write it up: Or ss orally report back: Every morning, Vien gets up at five thirty. He has breakfast at six fifteen IV.Homework:(1m) - Study model sentence & the vocabulary. - Write about your daily routine, using the substitution drill. - Prepare the picture on page 53. [ He/She] watches TV. -Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. Write it up: Or ss orally report back: Every morning, Vien gets up at five thirty. He has breakfast at six fifteen ..................... WEEK 9: Date of preparing: 18 / 10 /2011 - Date of teaching: 19 / 10 / 2011. Period : 26 Unit 5: things i do Lesson: 3: My day (A5-6) A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson ss will be able to use the simple present tense in Yes/no questions and short answers to talk about daily rountines I.Knowledge: Present vocabulary Practice the form: Do you/ they play football? Does she / he Yes, I/ We/ They do She/ he does No, I/ We/ They do not She/ he does not II.Skill: Speaking B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence 49

II.Checking: -Check the simple present tense in wh question III.New lesson: Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities 1.Revision:(3ms) +Pelmasim: Work in groups 1. Go to 2. school do listen to music watch TV

homework

2.Presentation:(12ms) +Pre teach: (to) play volleyball: Chi bng chuyn (to) play football (soccer): bng (to) play sports: Chi th thao a girl: C gi, c b - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. -Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words +Checking: R.O.R +Presentation dialogue: A5 P.54: - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue. - Asks Ss practice the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss to practice in groups & in pairs. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments.

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

- Practicing the dialogue in groups & in pairs. -Correcting the pronunciation. *Model sentence: Do you / they play volleyball ? -Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they dont. Does she / he play soccer ? -Yes, she / he does ; No, she / he doesnt -Filling in the table in individual, correcting

+Grid: asks ss to read the dialogue and make a grid about Nga, Thu, Lan, Vui, girls with answer key(*) Name Volleyball Football Vui Nga Lan Thu 3.Practice:(20ms) +Yes/ no question answer drill: A6 P.53 - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. 50

- Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation. Example exchange:

- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. Example exchange: a,S1:Do you play sports? S2: Yes, I do/ No, I don|t 4.Further practice:(7ms) Find SO who: ...watches T.V ...Plays football Name .....

S1: Do you / they play volleyball ? S2: Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they dont. S1: Does she / he play soccer ? S2: Yes, she / he does; No, she / he doesnt

- Working in to work in individual to interview each other by making the Yes / No question & fill the information in the table. ...does the housework - Going around & ask the other to get the information to fill the information in the ...Plays volleyball table Example exchange: ...listen to music S1:Do you watch T.V? S2: Yes, I do ...reads -Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in S1: What is your name? individual to interview each other by making the S2:{........} Yes / No question & fill the information in the S1: How do you spell it? S2: ........ table. -Examples with Ss & fill the information in the table . - Asks Ss to go around & ask the other. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. III.Consolidation:(1m) Asks the form of yes/ no question IV.Homework:(1m) Do number ................

WEEK 9: Date of preparing: 23/10 /2011 - Date of teaching: 24 / 10/ 2011. Period : 27 Unit 5: things i do Lesson: 4: My routine (B1-2) 51

Period: 27 A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson ss will be able to practice simple present tense by reading a picture story about Ba|s daily rountine I.Knowledge: Present vocabulary Practice saying the time to do the works II.Skill: Reading B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Check the simple present tense in wh question III.New lesson: Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities 1.Revision:(3ms) +Jumbled words: Work in groups okhueowsr= housework tislen= listen ader= Read ypal= Play cthaw= Watch 2.Pre- reading:(15ms) +Pre teach: (to) take a shower:(picture): Tm vi hoa sen Listen and repeat in chorus and individially (to) eat: (mine): n Copy down (to) start:(meaning): bt u (to) finish (antonym of start) Kt thc (to) have lunch (picture): n tra (to) go to bed (picture): i ng Work in groups +Checking: what and where take a shower finish eat have lunch go to bed +Open predition:B2 P.57 Asks ss to fill in the time in the table for Ba: -Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to guess the times on which Ba does his daily routine & fill in the table part 2 on page 57. -Asks Ss to give their prediction. -Comments. Presentation text: B2 P56. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text. 52 -Guessing the times on which Ba does his daily routine & fill in the table part 2 on page 57. - Giving their prediction. start

- Reading the text . - Checking the prediction.

- Asks Ss check their prediction. - Corrects & comments. Grid: B2 P57. -Asks Ss to read the dialogue in & fill in the table in individual. -Asks Ss to compare the information. -Asks Ss to give the information. - Corrects & comments.

Action

Time Ba You

Get up Go to school Classes start Classes finish Have lunch Go home Go to bed -Filling in the table in individual, correcting . Read the text in individially Work in pairs Work in individially Work in pairs 4. Survey: -Working in groups to ask each other the questions fill the answers in the box on the grid . - Reporting the information about their friends. Answer: a./ Ba get(s) up at 6.00. go(es) to school 6.45. has/have classes 7.00 11.15. I has / have lunch 11.30. go(es) home 5.00. go(es) to bed 10.00

3. While reading:(15ms) +Read the text to check their predictions 4.Post reading:(8ms) + Asks ss to complete the last column in the B2 table(about me) +Asks ss to do B3.P.57 -Gives the requirement & ask Ss to work in groups to ask each other the questions : a./ What time does Ba get up / Go to school / have classes / Have lunch / Go home / Go to bed ? b./ What time do you get up / Go to school / have classes / Have lunch / Go home / Go to bed ? & fill the answers in the box on the grid . - Asks Ss to report the information about their friends. -Corrects & comments.

III.Consolidation:(2ms) Asks the form of yes/ no question - Asks Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer the time to do the daily routine: - What time does Ba get up ? - He gets up - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. IV.Homework:(1m) - Study the questions & answers used to ask & answer the time to do the daily routine: - Exercise: write the time on which your family members do their daily routines ( base on the table B2 P 57). - Prepare the picture on page 58. ____________________________________________________________________________ WEEK 10: Date of preparing: 25/10 /2011 - Date of teaching: 26 / 10 / 2011. Period : 29 53

Unit 5: things i do Lesson: 5: Classes (C1) A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson ss will be able to talk about the school time table with have and Don|t have, school subjects vocab I.Knowledge: Present vocabuly about the subjects in school Practice the form: S1:What do we have today? S2:We have English. I do not have timetable. II.Skill: Speaking B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Check the vocabulary III.New lesson: Teacher/ s activities I.Presentation:(15ms) +Pre teach: a timetable(realia): thi kho biu English (Translation): Ting anh Math(Realia): Mn ton Literature(realia): Mn Vn History(Realia): Mn lch s Geography (Realia): Mn al Monday (Realia): Th hai - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. -Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words +Checking: ordering vocab Reads: first we have literature. Then we have Goegraphy . At 8 .40 we have English and then we have math. At 10.15 we have history . this is our timetable on Monday. +Presentation text: C1 P.58 - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text. - Checks Ss reading & the ordering. - Introduces the model sentence & helps Ss to

Students/ activities

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words. Listen and work in individially -Marking the vocabularies in order. - Giving their ordering. 3. English 4.Math 1.Literature 5.History 2.Geography 6.Monday - Reading the text & practicing the model in groups & in pairs. - Checking the ordering. * Model sentence -What do we have today ? (?) 54

practice in groups & in pairs. - Corrects & comments. 3.Practice:(20ms) +Word cue drill: English/ 7.00 Literature/ 8.40 Math/ 8.00 History/ 9.35

- We have English (+). - I dont have my timetable (-). - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . -Correcting the pronunciation. * Example exchange: S1: What do we have today ? S2: We have English. S1: What time does it start ? S2: [ 7.00 ]. - Listening to the dialogue. - Practicing the dialogue in chorus. - Practicing the dialogue in pairs. -Correcting pronunciation & the mistakes Example exchange: S1: What do we have today ? S2: We have history. S1: What time does it start ? S2: At 7.15 S1: Do we have literature at 8.40 ? S2:No, we dont. We have English. S1: What time does it finish ? S2: At 9.25

Geography/ 10.15

4.Further practice:(7ms) +Mapped dialogue: What........today? What time....start? Do we...literature... 8.40 What time.......finish..... What .... at 9.35? Do we....math? History 7.50 No, .......English 9.25 Geography yes, .....1015

III.Consolidation:(1m) Asks the way to use Have/ Do not have - Asks Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer the school timetable: -What do we have today ? (?) - We have English (+). - I dont have my timetable (-). - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. IV.Homework:(1m) - Study the model sentence. - Exercise: write about your school timetable. - Prepare the calendar on page 59.

WEEK 10: Date of preparing: 26 /10 /2011 - Date of teaching: 27 / 10 / 2011. Period : 30 Unit 5: things i do Lesson: 6: Classes (C2-3-4) Period: 30 A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson ss will be able to talk about the weekly timetable with has/ does not have, 55

days of the week vocab I.Knowledge: Present vocabulary Practice the form: S1: When do we have math? S2: We have it on....... II.Skill: Speaking C.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Check the form : What do we have today? We have{English } III.New lesson: Teacher/ s activities 1.Revision:(3ms) +Slap the board: English History Math Geography Literature Monday

Students/ activities

Work in groups

2.Presentation:(12ms) +Pre teach: Tuesday:(realia): Th 3 Wednesday: :(realia): Th 4 Thursday: :(realia): Th 5 Friday: :(realia): Th 6 Saturday: :(realia): Th 7 Sunday: :(realia): CN - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. -Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. +Checking: Matching: Tuesday Th 7 Wednesday Th 6 Thursday Th 5 Friday CN Saturday Th 4 Sunday Th 3 +Predict dialogue:(answer key C3.P.59)

Listen and repeat in chorus and individially Copy down

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

work in individially to match the words in English with the words in VietNamese

-Predicting the missing words of the dialogue & filling in. - Giving & Checking their prediction. - Practicing the dialogue in pairs. 56

-Introduces the dialogue & asks Ss to work in -Correcting pronunciation. pairs to predict the missing words of the dialogue & fill in. -Asks Ss to give their prediction. -Introduces the dialogue & helps Ss to check their prediction. Dialogue: ( With answer keys ) -Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. Nga: When do we have ( history ) ? -Corrects Ss pronunciation. Ba: We have it on (Tuesday) & (Thursday). Nga: When do we have ( math ) ? Nga: When do we have...............? Ba: We have it on (Mon),( Wed) & (Fri). Ba: We have it on...........and............... Nga: Does Lan have math on (Friday)?. Nga: When do have........................? Ba: ( No, she doesnt ). Ba: We have it on...........and............... Predict the missing words in groups Nga: Does Lan have math on.....? Ba: ............................ - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . 3.Practice:(20ms) -Correcting the pronunciation. +Board drill: * Example exchange: - Introduces the timetable & the example S1: When do we have Math ? exchange & Helps Ss to practice. S2: On Monday, Wednesday & Saturday - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Working in individual to write about their - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. weekly timetable. - Giving the timetable. 4.Production:(7ms) * Example sentence: We have math on .., and +Asks ss to fill in their real timetable( only five We have English on ..etc. subjects they have learn in English) in C2 P.59 - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in individual to write about their weekly timetable. - Asks Ss to give their timetable. - Corrects & comments. +Asks ss to write : We have math on ...........and..............., .. III.Consolidation:(1m) Asks the way to use Has/ Does not have - Ask Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer the weekly timetable: S1: When do we have Math ? S2: On Monday, Wednesday & Saturday - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. IV.Homework:(1m) - Study the model sentence. - Exercise: write about your weekly timetable. 57

- Prepare the exercises for the grammar practice part. WEEK 11 : Date of preparing: 30 / 10 /2011 - Date of teaching: 31/ 10 / 2011. Period : 31 Unit 5: things i do Lesson: 7: Grammar practiceP. 60-61 Period: 31 A.Objectives: I.Knowledge: By the end of this lesson ss will be able to practice in simple present tense, tell the time, adjective with be, question words, school subjects, days of week II.Skill: Speaking B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1M) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Do not check } III.New lesson: Teacher/ s activities 1.Telling the time(10M) +Realia drill: Grammar practice:2 P.60 - Introduces the example exchange & the picture then helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. +Dictatation: T reads: 1.45, 5.30, 8.15, 8.50, 12.00, 6.20, 3.30, 11.15, 10.25, 3.5, 2.40, 6.30, 9.00, 4.35 2.Question words(10m) +Grammar practice: 4 P.61 +Noughts and crosses: Le loi street 2 floors Literature Tuesday 5.30 7.00 Students/ activities

- Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . -Correcting the pronunciation. Example exchange: S1:What time is it? S2: It is seven

N-G- A Grade 6 I play football

-Practice in groups. -How do you spell your name ? -What do you have today ? -What time do you get up ? -Which grade are you in ? -When do you have math ? -What time do you go to school ? -What do you do after school ? 58

Asks ss to make questions 3.Adj with be (10m) Grammar practice: 3 P.61 +Word cue drill: House school city country street Family

-What do you do in the afternoon ?

Work in pairs

living room Example exchange S1: Is your {house} big? S2: Yes,it is /No it is not. 4.Present simple tense(10) +Find SO who: Name Find SO who .....gets dressed .....go to bed at 10.00 .....eats a big breakfast .....have lunch .....plays volleyball after school .....does the housework -Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in individual to interview each other by making the Yes / No question & fill the information in the table. -Examples with Ss & fill the information in the table . - Asks Ss to go around & ask the other. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments +word cue drill: Mon Tue Wed Thur Fri Sat - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments III.Consolidation(2m) 59

- Working in to work in individual to interview each other by making the Yes / No question & fill the information in the table. - Going around & ask the other to get the information to fill the information in the table

- Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . -Correcting the pronunciation. Example exchange: S1: What do you have on Monday ? S2: We have [math] & {English]. S1: Do you have [history] on Monday ? S2: Yes, I do. / No, I dont.

Do grammar practice 1 P.60 and 5-7 P.61 - Asks Ss to summarize the use of all the grammars. IV.Homework(2m) - Study the grammar & the model sentences. - Prepare the picture on page 62. WEEK 11: Date of preparing: 1 / 11 /2011 - Date of teaching: 2 / 11 / 2011. Period :32 Unit 6: places Lesson: 1: Our house (A1-2-3) A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson ss will be able to read a text about where Thuy lives to understand the detailss and practice country vocabulary I.Knowledge: Present vocabulary Reading a text to know more about the describing the place I.Skill: Reading B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Do not check III.New lesson:

60

Teacher/ s activities 1.Pre reading(12ms) +Pre teach: A lake: (Picture): H A river:(Picture): Sng A tree: (Picture): Cy A flower: (Picture) : Bng hoa A rice paddy: (Picture): Cnh ng A park: (Picture): Cng vin - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. -Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. +Checking: What and where: A lake A flower A river A tree A park

Students/ activities

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

-Ss enjoy the game.

A rice paddy

+Open prediction: What are near Thuy|s house? 2.While reading(20ms) +Check their predictions: Asks ss to read the text in A1 P.62: Our house +Ordering vocabulary: P.62: T reads thesecond bubble aloud: It is beautiful here .There is a river andnear our house. Answer key: a lake-2 Trees-4 A river-1 Flowers-5 A rice paddy-6 A park-3 +Matching: Asks ss to read the text again and guess the meaning of these words from context and match(with anwer key) Near A yard Beautiful A hotel Khch sn Xinh p Gn Sn

- Predicting Whats near Thuys house & write 3 things in their books. - Giving the prediction. - Reading the text . - Checking the prediction

-Matching the meaning of the words from the context -Comparing & giving the information.

+Comprehension questions: A1P.62 Questions: a- -Working in pairs to answer. Then giving the f keys. -Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to answer. Then give the keys. 61

-Corrects & comments. Questions: 1./ How old is Thuy ? 2./ What does she do ? 3./ Whats her brothers name ? 4./ How old is he ? 5./ Where does Thuy live ? 6./ Whats there, near Thuys house ? 3.Post reading (7ms) +Picture drill:P.62 or P.63 - Introduces the pictures 0n page 62/63 & the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . -Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments +Write it up: A3 P.63

Answer: 1./ She is twelve years old. 2./ She is a student. 3./ Her brothers name is Minh. 4./ He is twenty. 5./ Thuy lives in a house. 6./ A lake, a rice paddy, a park, a river, a hotel - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation. *Example exchange: A: Whats that ? B: Its a [river]. A: What are those ? B: They are [trees].

III.Consolidation(3ms) Asks again vocabulary - Asks Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer about the things: A: Whats that ? B: Its a [river]. - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. IV.Homework(2ms) - Study the vocabulary & the exchange. - Exercise: write whats near your house. WEEK 11: Date of preparing: 2 / 11 /2011 - Date of teaching: 3/ 11 / 2011. Period : 33 Unit 6: places Lesson: 2: Our house (A4,5,6,7) Period: 33 A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in Simple present tense & WH questions with He / She to talk about other peoples daily routines. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about other peoples daily routines. I.Knowledge: 62 A: What are those ? B: They are [trees].

Present vocabulary Reading a text to know more about the describing the place I.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Do not check III.New lesson: TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 20 M. 1.Vocabulary: (to) listen to music; nghe nhc (picture) (to) watch TV; xem ti vi (picture) (to) do the housework; lm bi tp v nh (to) read. c (picture) - Introduces the words by explaining the -Listening to the words. meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). -Copying the words & Correcting the - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the pronunciation. mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. +Check vocabulary: -Enjoying the game. R.O.R 2. Ordering vocabulary: -Introduces the words & ask Ss to copy down. - Copying down the words listening to the Then reads the sentences in unorder & asks Ss sentences & take note the right order. to listen & take note the right order. - Checking & correcting -Helps Ss to check & corrects. *Teacher reads: Every morning, Lan gets up & listens to music. Every afternoon she comes home *Answer keys: & does the houseworks. Then she watches TV. 1..(to) listen to music; 3. (to) watch TV; Every evening she reads & does her homeworks. 2.(to) do the houseworks; 4.(to) read 3. Presentation text: A31/P53. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. - Asks Ss to read the text in individual. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. - Reading the dialogue in individual. -Correcting the pronunciation. *Model sentence: 4. Comprehension questions: A4-P53 - What does Ba do after school ? -Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in He watches TV. pairs to answer. Then give the keys. -Corrects & comments. -Working in pairs to answer. Then giving the keys. Questions: 1./ What does Lan do after school ? Answer: 63

2./ What does Ba do after school ? 3./ What does Thu do after school ? 4./ What does Nam do after school ?

1./ Lan does the houseworks . 2./ Ba watches TV. 3./ Thu reads. 4./ Nam listens to music.

II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M. 5. Picture drill. A3 - P53. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to - Repeating in chorus & in individual. practice. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to - Practicing in groups & in pairs . repeat in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the pronunciation. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. *Model sentence: - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in - What does [Ba / Lan] do after school ? groups & in pairs . [ He/She] watches TV. -Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M 6. Noughts & Crosses: - Working in groups to choose the cue & make the -Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in question & the answer. groups to choose the cue & make the question & *Example exchange: the answer. S1: What does Ba do every morning? - Corrects & comments. S2: [ He gets dresses ]. He / play game She / brush her teeth Lan / do the house works Ba / get dressed Nam / go to school Thu / do her homeworks She / wash her face He / have breakfast Mai / listen to music IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to give the model sentence used to talk about others daily routine: - What does [Ba/Lan] do after school ? [ He/She] watches TV. - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homeworks: (Time: 2M) - Study model sentence & the vocabulary. - Write about your family members daily routine. WEEK 12: Date of preparing: 6 / 11 /2011 - Date of teaching: 7 / 11 / 2011. Period : 34 Unit 6: places Lesson: 3: In the city(B1,2,3,4,5) P.65-67. A.Objectives: : - Helps Ss to read a text about where Minh lives. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the details & town vocabulary & prepositions of place. I.Knowledge: Present vocabulary Reading a text to know more about the describing the place II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. 64

B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Do not check III.New lesson: TEACHER'S WORKS I.PRE-READING Time: 10 M. 1.Vocabulary: a (book) store (n); tim sch (picture) a restaurant (n); nh hng (picture) a temple (n); miu th (picture) a hospital (n); bnh vin (picture) a factory (n); nh my (picture) museum (n); bo tng (picture) a stadium (n). sn vn ng (example) - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. -Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. +Check vocabulary. -Slap the board 2. True / False prediction: B4-P49. -Introduces the statements & ask Ss to work in pairs to predict what is near Minhs house. -Asks Ss to compare their prediction. -Asks Ss to give their prediction. -Comments. *Answer key: 1../ T; 2./ F; 3./ T;

STUDENTS' WORKS

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

-enjoying the game. - Working in pairs to predict. - Comparing their prediction. -Giving their prediction. * Statements: Near Minhs house 1./ There is a restaurant. 2./ There is a lake.. 3./ There is a hospital.

II.WHILE-READING Time: 20 M. 3. Presentation text: B1-P65. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text. - Reading the text . - Asks Ss check their prediction. - Checking the prediction. - Corrects & comments. 4. Comprehension questions: B1-P66. -Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in -Working in pairs to answer. Then giving the pairs to choose the True / False statements & keys. complete the sentences.Then give the keys. -Corrects & comments. 5./ Minhs mother works in a factory. 6./ Minhs father works in a hospital True / False statements: B1-P66 1./ Minh lives in the country. Answer key: 2./ There are four people in his family. 1../ F; 2./ T; 3./ F; 4./ T; 5./ F; 6./ F; 3./ Their house is next to a bookstore. 65

4./ There is museum near their house. Complete the sentences: 1./ Minh & his family live in the ........ 2./ On the street, there is a.....,a......& a......... 3./ His mother works in a............. 4./ His father work in a ...............

Answer key: 1./ Minh & his family live in the CITY. 2./ On the street, there is a RESTAURANT, a BOOKSTORE & a TEMPLE. 3./ His mother works in a HOSPITAL. 4./ His father work in a FACTORY.

III.POST -READING (Time: 10 M) 6. Dictation: B3 - P67. - Reads the words in the box & asks Ss to listen - Listening & rewriting the words they hear. & rewrite the words they hear. - Comparing their copying. - Asks Ss to compare their copying. - Checking the words. - Reads the words again to help Ss to check. -- Asks Ss to give the words they copied. - Asks Ss to give the words they copied. -Corrects & comments a Museum Stadium Temple Hospital b Restaurant Store Bookstore Factory c Park River Lake Yard d Hotel House Street Tree IV. CONSOLIDATION ( TIME: 2M) ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V. Home works : (time: 2m) - Study the vocabulary & the answer. - Exercise: write about your house and you family members. - Prepare the place vocabulary. WEEK 12: Date of preparing: 8 /11 /2011 - Date of teaching: 9/ 11/ 2011. Period : 35 Unit 6: places Lesson: 4: Around the house (C1-2) A.Objectives: : - Helps Ss to practice in more preposition of places: IN FRONT OF; TO THE LEFT/ RIGHT OF; BEHIND. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use preposition to describe the position of the house. I.Knowledge: -Present vocabulary: in front of; to the left/ right of; behind. -Preposition of places. -Reading a text to know more about the describing the place II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Do not check III.New lesson: 66

TEACHER'S WORKS I.PRESENTATION (Time: 15 M.) 1.Vocabulary: in front of:((prep.) pha trc (example) behind(prep.) pha sau (relia) to the left/ right of: (prep.): pha bn tri/ bn phi.(example) - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. -Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. +Check vocabulary. -R.O.R 2. Board drill: - Draws the house with a tree & practice the example exchange with Ss in groups & in pairs. - Asks Ss to practice in groups & in pairs. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & mistakes. * Example exchange; S1: Where is the tree ? S2: Its [next to] the house. 3. Presentation text: C1 - P68. - Introduces the text & helps Ss to read in groups & in pairs. - Check Ss reading - Corrects Ss pronunciation & mistakes. II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M. 4. Comprehension questions: C1 - P68. -Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to answer. Then give the keys. -Corrects & comments. Questions: 1./ Where is the yard ? 2./ Where are the tall trees ? 3./ Where are the mountains ? 4./ Where is the well ? 5./ Where are the flowers ? 6./ Where is the house ? 5. Picture drill. C1 - P68. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in

STUDENTS' WORKS

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words. - Practicing in groups & in pairs by repeating the position of the tree. -Enjoyng the game. - Corrects the pronunciation & mistakes. * next to the house near the house in front of the house behind the house to the left of the house to the right of the house - Reading the text in groups & in pairs. - Corrects the pronunciation & mistakes.

-Working in pairs to answer. Then giving the keys. Answer: 1./ Its in front of the house ? 2./ They are behind the house ? 3./ They are behind the tall trees ? 4./ Its in to the left of the house? 5./ They are to the right of the house ? 6./ Its behind the yard ?

- Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation. *Example exchange: S1: Where are the [mountains] ? S2: They are [behind] the tall trees. 67

groups & in pairs . -Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M 6. Noughts & Crosses: - Working in groups to choose the cue & make the -Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in sentences about Thuys house (& Minhs house). groups to choose the cue & make the sentences Example: about Thuys house (& Minhs house). - Near Thuys house there is a lake - Corrects & comments. - Next to Minhs house there is a store. A lake - ( a store ) A hotel - ( a stadium ) A yard - ( a temple ) Trees -( a street ) A street - ( a hospital ) A park - ( a factory ) A rice paddy - ( museum ) A river - ( trees ) Flowers - ( restaurant ) IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ): -Asks Ss to give the model sentence used to ask the position of thing near their house & the preposition of places: S1: Where are the [mountains] ? S2: They are [behind] the tall trees. -Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homeworks: ( Time: 2M - Study model sentence & the preposition. - Write about thing near your house. - Prepare the picture on page 70.

WEEK 12: Date of preparing: 9 /11 /2011 - Date of teaching: 10 / 11 / 2011. Period : 36 Unit 6: places Lesson: 5: Around the house (C3,4,5,6) A.Objectives: : - Helps Ss to practice in WHERE IS/ WHERE ARE...questions & answer with town vocabulary & preposition of place to describe a street. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe a street I.Knowledge: : - WHERE IS/ WHERE ARE... -Reading a text to know more about the describing the place II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Do not check III.New lesson: TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. . 1.Vocabulary: the drug store: tim thuc ty (picture) the toystore: tim chi (picture) 68

the movie theater: Rp chiu phim (picture) the police station: n cng an (picture) the bakery: Tim bnh m (picture) between(prep.) gia (rexample) opposite(prep.) i din (example) - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. -Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. +Check vocabulary. -Slap the board 2. Presentation text: C3 - P70. - Introduces the text & helps Ss to read in groups & in pairs. - Check Ss reading & Corrects Ss pronunciation & mistakes. II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M. 3. Picture drill. C4 a) - P70. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . -Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. 4. Guessing game: C4 b) - P71. - Asks Ss to write a place in the picture on page 70 on a piece of paper. - Asks Ss to make Yes/ No questions to guess the place in the paper & change the role. - Comments the game. Example: Its opposite the movie theater. What is it ? Its is the police station. Yes, thats right. III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M 5. Survey: C5 -P71. -Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to interview each other about the places near their house & take note the information & fill in the table. -Asks Ss to report the information.

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

-Enjoying the game. - Reading the text in groups & in pairs. - Corrects the pronunciation & mistakes.

- Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation. *Example exchange: S1: Where are the [.........] ? S2: Its opposite the.......... Its between the ...and the... - Writing a place in the picture on page 70 on a piece of paper. - Making Yes/ No questions to guess the place in the paper & change the role. * Statements: 1./ Its opposite the bakery. 2./ its between the bakery & the drugstore. 3./ Its next to the bakery. 4./ Its opposite the bookstore. 5./ Its next to the movie theater. - Working in pairs to interview each other about the places near their house & take note the information & fill in the table. -Reporting the information. * Example exchange:

69

- Corrects & comments. Name In front of be hind opposite

S1: Whats [in front of] your house ? S2: [ A rice paddy]. to the left of to the right of Near

IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 3 M ): -Asks Ss to give the questions & model sentence used to ask & answer the position of things near the house & the preposition of places: S1: Where are the [..........] ? S2: Its opposite the................ Its between the ..........and the................ -Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homeworks: (TIME: 2M) - Study model sentence & the questions. - Consolidate all the model sentences & the grammars & redo the exercise in the students book to prepare for the forty-five minute test. WEEK 13: Date of preparing: 13/11 /2011 - Date of teaching: 14 / 11 / 2011. Period : 37 Written test Time: 45minutes

70

WEEK 13: Date of preparing: 15 /11 /2011 - Date of teaching: 16 / 11/ 2011. Period : 38 Unit 7: The world of work Lesson 1: Is your house big? (A1,2,3,4,5,6,7) A.Objectives: : - Helps Ss to listen to a dialogue & read a letter about a house. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail of the dialogue & the letter. I.Knowledge: : -Reading and listening a text to know more about the describing the place II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Do not check III.New lesson: TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRE-LISTENING Time: 5 M. 1.True / False statement prediction: (Grid) - Working in pairs to predict which the - Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in statements is true or false. pairs to predict which the statements is true or - Comparing & Giving the keys. false. Yes No - Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys & big ? Comments small ? a yard ? 71

a well ? flowe trees II.WHILE-LISTENING Time: 10 M: 2. Presentation dialogue: A1-P72. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & get the details. - Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & check the prediction & Corrects. III.PRE-READING Time: 10 M 3. Vocabulary: Slap the Board. a garden (n); a vegetable (n); a photo (n). - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 4.True / False statement prediction: - Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in pairs to predict which the statements is true or false. - Asks Ss to compare & give the keys & Comments.. * Answer keys: 1. T; 2. F; 3. F; 4. T; IV.WHILE-READINGTime: 10 M 5. Presentation text: A2-P73. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the letter & get the details. - Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter. - Corrects comments. 6. Comprehension questions: A2/P73. - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Helps Ss to correct & comments. a. Is there a flowers garden in front of the house ? b. Is the house beautiful ? c. Is there a flowers garden behind the house? d. Is there a lake to the right of the house? e. Is Nga in the city ?

s? ?

- Listening to the dialogue & getting the details. - Listening to the dialogue & checking the prediction.

- Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

- Working in pairs to predict which the statements is true or false. - Comparing & Giving the keys. * Statements: 1. The house is in the country. 2. There is a river near the house. 3. Therere trees to the left of the house. 4. Therere two gardens. - Reading the letter & get the details. - Giving the main idea of the letter.

- Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting A. Yes, it is. B. No, it isnt. C. No, she isnt. D. Yes, there is.. E. No, there isnt. Answer: 72

a D; V.POST-LISTENING & READING Time: 5 M 7. Transformation writing: - Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work in individual to change the underlined information to describe their own house & then draw a picture of it as a photo . - Asks Ss to give their information & comments.

b A;

c E;

d E;

e C.

- Writing in individual & giving the information. * My house: Theres a flowers garden in front of the house. Theres a vegetable garden behind the house. To the left of the house, theres a lake. To the right of the house, there are tall trees. Here is a photo. .

I.PRESENTATION 1. Vocabulary: Slap the Board a bank (n); a clinic (n); shops a post office (n); a supermarket (n); - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words 2. Presentation dialogue: A1-P72. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue. - Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - Introduces the model sentence & helps Ss to practice. - Checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments.

- Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

- Practicing the dialogue in pairs -Correcting the pronunciation. - Practicing the model sentence in groups & in pairs. * Model sentence: - Is there a yard ? - Yes, there is. well ? - No, there isnt. -Are there any flowers ? Yes, there are. trees ? No, there arent. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation * Example exchange: S1: Is there [a hotel] near your house ? S2: Yes, there is. / No, there isnt. S1: Are there any [shops] near your house ? S2: Yes, there are. / No, there arent. 73

II.PRACTICE 3. Picture drill: A3b) P74. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments.

III.FURTHER PRACTICE 4. Survey: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in groups to ask & answer about the others house & take note the information into the table. - Asks Ss to compare & report the information. - Comments Ss information.

- Working in groups to ask & answer about the others house & taking note the information into the table. - Comparing & reporting the information.

Name There is a lake.. There are flowers. There is a well There are tall trees There is vegetable garden.. There are shops. IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework: ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & example exchange - Using the survey to write about your house. - Prepare the picture on page 76 & read the texts at home. WEEK 13: Date of preparing: 16 /11 /2011 - Date of teaching: 17 / 11/ 2011. Period : 39

Unit 7: Lesson 3: town or country? (B1-2) A.Objectives: : - Helps Ss to read a text about Bas & Chis house to understand the differences between town & country. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail of the text & compare the life in city & the country. -Helps Ss to practice in integrated skill to describe the place where they live. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe the place where they live. I.Knowledge: : -Reading and listening a text to know more about the describing the place II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: -Do not check III.New lesson: TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRE-READING Time: 10 M. 74

1. Vocabulary: RoR. a market (n); an apartment (n); paddy field = rice paddy (n); noisy quiet (adj); a zoo (n); - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Kims game: B1 P76/77. - Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to look at the pictures to remember things in these picture. - Hides the pictures & asks Ss to talk about the things they saw. Using this model sentences: - Comments the game.

- Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

- Looking at the pictures to remember things in these picture. - Talking about the things they saw. Using the model sentences: * Model sentences: 1) + Theres a zoo, a post office.. + Theres a lake, a river.. 2)S1: Do you live in town ? S2: No. I live in the country. S1: Does he live in town ? S2: No. He lives in the country.

II.WHILE-READING Time: 20 M 3. Presentation text: B1 P76/77. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the texts about - Reading the letter & get the details. Bas & Chis house & get the details. - Giving the main idea of the letter. - Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter. - Corrects comments. 4. Comprehension questions: B1 P76. - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to ask & answer the questions to the answers. - Helps Ss to correct & comments. * Questions: a. Does Ba live in town ? b. Does he live in a house ? c. Is it noisy ? d. Does Chi live in town ? e. Are there any stores ? - Working in pairs to ask & answer the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting * Answer keys: A. Yes, he does. B. No, he doesnt C. Yes, it is. D. No, she doesnt 75

f. Is it quiet ? III.POST- READING Time: 10M 2. Word cue drill: - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. Town / country House / apartment Lake / river Hospital / factory *Compare:

E. No, there arent. F. Yes, it is. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation * Example exchange: S1: Do you live in town ? S2: No. I live [ in the country ]. S1: Do you live near [ a lake ] ? S2: No. I live [ near a river ]. Supermarket / market Shop / paddy field Zoo / museum

In town In the country its noisy its quiet we live in an apartment etc. there arent any paddy fields there is a zoo there are shops etc. IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homeworks: ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & the content of the texts. - Exercise: write a short paragraph to compare the differences between town & country base on the information you have compared . - Prepare the pictures on page 76 & 77.

WEEK 14: Date of preparing: 20/11 /2011 - Date of teaching: 21 / 11 / 2011. Period : 41 Unit 7: The world of work Lesson 4:On the movie( C1-2) A.Objectives: : - Helps Ss to practice in Simple present with How questions & by car / by bike / by train to talk about transportation. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their moves. 76

I.Knowledge: - Simple present with How questions & by car / by bike / by train II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: Revision ( 5 M ) : Guessing game - Asks Ss to choose a place in town ( factory; Model sentence: B4 P77. museum; post office; ) & complete the S1: Do you live near a part ? sentences strip & play the game in groups. S2: No, I dont. - Corrects & comments. S1: Do you live near a bank ? S2: Yes, I do.. III.New lesson: TEACHER'S WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: ROR: by car ; by bus; by bike; by motorbike; by train; by plane - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the pictures on P78/79. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. -Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Presentation text: C1-2/ P78-79. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. - Asks Ss read the text in silence. - Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss to practice in groups & in pairs. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments.

STUDENTS' WORKS

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

- Reading the text in silence. - Practicing in groups & in pairs. -Correcting the pronunciation. *Model sentence: How do you go to school ? does he work ? I travel / go by bike. He travels / goes car.

77

II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M. 3. Substitution drill: C1-2/ P78-79. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. * 11 pictures cues: Lien; Thu; Tuan; Hoa; Huong; Mr. Nam; Mrs. Lan; Mr. Ba; Miss. Hoa; Mr Kim;

- Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation * Example exchange: S1: How does [Lien] go to school ? S2: She goes by [bike]. S1: How does [Mr. Nam] travel to work ? S2: He travels by [train].

III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M 4. Noughts & Crosses: - Introduces the content & helps Ss to practice - Practicing the game in two groups. the game in two groups. - Choosing the name to make the question & - Asks Ss to choose the name to make the answer. question & answer. - Corrects & Comments the game. Mrs. Dung Mrs. Lan Mr. Hai Lien Thu Tuan Mr. Ba Mr. Kim Miss. Hoa IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homeworks: ( Time: 2M ): - Study the vocabulary & example exchange - Read the text C4 , P80 at home & prepare the times you do your daily routine _________________________________________________________________________ WEEK 14: Date of preparing: 22/ 11 /2011 - Date of teaching: 23 / 11 / 2011. Period : 42 Unit 7: The world of work Lesson 5:On the movie( C3,4,5,6) A.Objectives: : - Helps Ss to read a text about Hoangs daily routine for further practice in Simple present habitual actions. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail of the text talk about their daily routine. I.Knowledge: : - Simple present. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. 78

B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: Find someone who(5m) - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in groups to ask & answer about the time & the transportation & fill the name into the table. - Asks Ss to compare & report the information. - Comments Ss information.

Find someone who gets up at 5.30 gets up at 6.00 walks to school goes to school by bus goes to school by bike

Name

III.New lesson: TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRE-READING Time: 10 M. 1. Open prediction: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work - Working in individual to predict what time in individual to predict what time Hoang does Hoang does the following things. the following things. - Comparing & giving their prediction. - Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction. What time? - Comments Ss prediction. He gets up 5.30 He leaves the house 6.30 School starts 7.00 School ends 11.30 He has lunch 12.00 II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M 2. Presentation text: C4 P80. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text & get - Reading the text & getting the details & the details & check the prediction. checking the prediction - Asks Ss to give the main idea of the text. - Giving the main idea of the letter. - Corrects comments. 3. Comprehension questions: C4 P80. - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in - Working in pairs to match the questions to the pairs to match the questions to the answers. answers. - Helps Ss to correct & comments. - Giving the answer keys. * Questions: - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting a. What time does Hoang get up ? * Answers: b. What time does he go to school ? a. Hoang gets up at 5.30. c. Does he go to school by car ? b. He goes to school at 6.30. d. Does he walk to school ? c. No, he doesnt. e. What time do classes start ? d. Yes, he does. f. What time do they end ? e. Classes start at 7.00. f. They end at 11.30

79

III.POST- READING Time: 10 M 4. Survey: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to ask each other about the time they do these things & fill the information into the table. - Asks Ss to compare & report the information. - Comments Ss information. Get up Go to school Classes start Classes end Go home Have lunch

- Working in pairs to ask each other about the time they do these things & filling the information into the table. - Comparing& reporting the information. What time ? Name Name

IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homeworks: ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & the content of the text. - Write about your time to do your daily things. - Prepare the picture on page 82. WEEK 15 Date of preparing: 23/ 11 /2011 - Date of teaching: 24 / 11 / 2011. Period : 44 CORRECT

WEEK 15 Date of preparing: 23/ 11 /2011 - Date of teaching: 24 / 11 / 2011. Period : 44 Unit 8: out and about Lesson 1: what are you doing?( A1-3) A.Objectives: : - Helps Ss to practice in Present progressive positive statements with I/ She/ he to talk about actions happening now. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about actions happening now. I.Knowledge: - Present progressive positive statements with I/ She/ he II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence 80

II.Checking: III.New lesson: TEACHER'S WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: ROR: (to) play video games; (to) ride a bike; (to) drive; (to) wait for. - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the pictures on P78/79. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. -Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Presentation text: A1- P82 (Top 3 Pictures only ). - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. - Asks Ss read the text in silence. - Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss to practice in groups & in individual. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. - Introduces the form & use of the grammar. * Present progressive positive statements: + Form: I/ He/ She + tobe + V-ing. + Use: Talk about happening things. II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M. 3. Picture drill: - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. * Note: using the pictures on page 82 for the cues.

STUDENTS' WORKS

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

- Reading the text in silence. - Practicing in groups & in individual. -Correcting the pronunciation. *Model sentence: I m [am] He/ She s is playing games riding a bike. driving.

- Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation * Example exchange: a) Im [walking to school ]. b) Hes / Shes [waiting for a bus].

III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M 4. Noughts & Crosses: - Introduces the content & helps Ss to practice - Practicing the game in two groups. the game in two groups. - Choosing the name to make the question & - Asks Ss to choose the name to make the answer. 81

question & answer. - Corrects & Comments the game. Walk to school Drive a bus Travel by bus Wait for a train Ride a bike Play a game Go by plane Drive a car Ride a motorbike IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. - Asks Ss to give the form & use of the Present progressive positive statements with I/ She/ he to talk about actions happening now: * Present progressive positive statements: + Form: I/ He/ She + tobe + V-ing. + Use: Talk about happening things. V. Homeworks( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & example exchange. - Exercise: Write five sentences about things are happening. - Read the text A1 P82 at home & prepare the pictures on P82. WEEK 14: Date of preparing: 27 /11 /2011 - Date of teaching: 28 / 11 / 2011. Period : 45 Unit 8: out and about Lesson 2: what are you doing?( A4-7) Period: 45 A.Objectives: : - Helps Ss to practice in Present progressive with WH - question with she / he / they to talk about actions happening now. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to ask & answer about actions happening now. I.Knowledge: - Present progressive positive statements with I/ She/ he -WH - question with she / he / they . II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: III.New lesson: TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1. Presentation text: A2 / P83 . Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. - Reading the text in silence. - Asks Ss read the text in silence. - Practicing in groups & in individual. - Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss to -Correcting the pronunciation. practice in groups & in individual. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. *Model sentence: 82

- Introduces the form & use of the grammar. - What * Present progressive WH- question: +Form: What + tobe + I/ He/ She+ V-ing? We/ You/ They + Use: Asking about things happening now. II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M. 2. Picture drill: Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss in the whole class & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. * Note: using the pictures on page 83 for the cues. s (is) he / she doing ? are you / they

- He / she s (is) studying. I m (am)

- Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups with teacher & in closed pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation * Example exchange: + Teacher whole class drill: a) S1: Whats he doing ? S2: He is doing his homework. + Closed pair work drill: b) S1: What are they doing ? S2: Theyre waiting for a bus.

III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M 3. Answer given: A6 - P85. - Gives the answers on the board & asks Ss to read the text in part 6 on page 85 & work in pairs to make the questions . - Asks Ss to compare the questions. Asks Ss to give the questions by role playing in pairs. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & Comments the questions. * Answer given: a) Mr. Ha is a businessman. He is going to Hanoi. b) Miss. Hoa is a teacher. She is going to school. c) Mr. Tuan & Mrs. Vui are doctors. They are going to the hospital.

- Reading the text in part 6 on page 85 & working in pairs to make the questions . - Comparing the questions. Giving the questions by role playing in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation & Commenting the questions. * Question keys: a) Who is this / Who are they ? b) What is he / she doing ? are they c) Where is he/she going ? are they d) How is she / he traveling ? are they

IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. - Asks Ss to give the form & use of the Present progressive with WH - question with she / he / they to talk about actions happening now * Present progressive WH- question: +Form: What + tobe + I/ He/ She + V-ing? We/ You/ They V.Homeworks ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the grammar & the example exchange. 83

- Exercise: 1-P72; 2-P72; 3-P73; - Read the text B1 P86 at home & prepare the pictures on P86. WEEK 14: Date of preparing: 29 /11 /2011 - Date of teaching: 30 / 11 / 2011. Period : 46 Unit 8: out and about Lesson 3: A TRUCK DRIVE ( B1) Period: 46 A.Objectives: : - Helps Ss to read a picture story about a truck driver. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the main ideas & get some information about the text. I.Knowledge: : - Present progressive positive statements with I/ She/ he -WH - question with she / he / they . II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: III.New lesson: TEACHER'S WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 10 M. 1. Vocabulary: - Matching. a truck driver (n); quy bn thc phm a farmer (n); ngi li xe ti a foodstall; d hng xung (to) load cht hng ln (to0 unload; n (to) arrive at; nng dn - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning by matching the words to the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Ordering statements . - Gives the un-order statements about the text & STUDENTS' WORKS

- Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Giving the meaning by matching & the pronunciation & Correcting the mistakes. - Copying the words.

- Working in groups to guess the order of these statements. 84

asks Ss to work in groups to guess the order of - Comparing their ordering. these statements. - Giving their ordering. - Asks Ss to compare their ordering. - Asks Ss give their ordering. - Comments Ss ordering. * Statements: 1. going to Hanoi. 2. Meeting the farmer. 3. Having breakfast 4. Going to a farm 5. Loading vegetable in the truck 6. Unloading the truck II.WHILE-READING Time: 20 M. 3. Presentation text: B1 P86. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the story about the truck driver & get the details. - Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter. - Asks Ss to check their ordering. - Corrects comments. 4. Comprehension questions: B1 P87. - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Helps Ss to correct & comments. * Questions: a. What does Mr. Quang do ? b. Where is he going at 5.am ? c. Who is waiting for him ? d. Where is he taking vegetables ? e. What is he doing at 7.00 ? f. Where is he eating ? III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M 5. Chain game: - Introduces the requirements & helps Ss to play the game in the whole class by talking about Mr. Quang routine. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments the game. a b c d e f I think c I read

- Reading story & get the details. - Giving the main idea of the letter. - Checking the ordering. * Answer keys: a: 4; b: 2; c: 5; d: 1; e: 6; f:3. - Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting * Answers: a. He is a truck driver. b. He is going to a farm. c. A farmer is waiting for him. d. Hes taking vegetables at the farm e. He is eating his breakfast. f. Hes eating at the foodstall. - Playing the game in the whole class by talking about Mr. Quang routine. -Correcting the pronunciation & commenting the game. * Example: S1: Mr. Quang gets up at 5.00 in the morning. S2: Mr. Quang gets up at 5.00 in the morning and he is going to a farm. S3:

IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V. Homework ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & the main idea of the story. 85

- Exercise: 1-P73; 2-P74 workbook; - Read the text C1-P89 at home & prepare the road sign. WEEK 16: Date of preparing: 30 /11 /2011 - Date of teaching: 1 / 12 / 2011. Period : 47 Unit 8: out and about Lesson 4: ROAD SIGNS. (C1-2) A.Objectives: : - Helps Ss to practice in CAN / CANT statements & traffic vocabulary. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about what you are allowed & not allowed to do on the road. I.Knowledge: : - CAN / CANT II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: III.New lesson: TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 10M. 1 Vocabulary: Slap the board. a policeman (n); difficult (adj); a sign (n); one-way (n); (to) park; (to) go straight. (to) turn left / right; Introduces the words by explaining the - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual & meaning, using the situation & gives example. Correcting the mistakes - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Copying the words. - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Noughts & Crosses: - Introduces the name of the places & divides Ss into two groups to practice by making questions - Working in groups to make questions & answers & answers about what people doing. about what people doing. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys by role-playing - Giving the answer keys by role-playing in pairs. in pairs. - Correcting Ss pronunciation. 86

- Corrects & comments the game. (drive) a car (ride) a motorbike (turn) left

* Example exchange: S1: What is he doing ? S2: Hes driving a car.. (ride) a bike (walk) (park) (wait for ) a bus (go) straight (turn) right

II.PRACTICE Time: 20-M. 3. Presentation text: C1 P89. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. - Asks Ss read the text in silence. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. 4. Comprehension questions: - Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions. - Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects. * Questions: a. What does Hoan do ? b. Is his job difficult ?. Tell me why ? c. What does this sign mean ? * Note: Points to the road signs & asks Ss to explain the meaning. 2. Picture drill: - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss in the whole class & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments.

- Reading the text in silence. -Correcting the pronunciation. - Working in pairs to answer the questions. - Giving the answers & correcting. * Answers: a. He is a policeman. b. Yes, it is. Because it is . c. You can park here. .. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups with teacher & in closed pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation * Example exchange: a) S1: What does this sign mean ? S2: He is doing his homework.

III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M 3.Complete sentences: C2-P89-90. - Introduces the requirements & the road sign then asks Ss to add CAN or CANT to the gap base on the signs . Asks Ss to give the keys by role playing in pairs. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & Comments the questions.

- Adding CAN or CANT to the gap base on the signs . Asks Ss to give the keys by role playing in pairs. -Correcting the pronunciation. * Answer keys: a. can; b. cant; c. can; d. cant.

IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. - Asks Ss to give the traffic vocabulary & the road signs. & explain the meaning. 87

V. Homework ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & the example exchange. - Exercise: 1- 2-P75 workbook. -Read the text C3 P90 at home & prepare the pictures on P90 & the road signs.. WEEK 16: Date of preparing: 4 /12 /2011 - Date of teaching: 5 / 12 / 2011. Period : 48 Unit 8: out and about Lesson 5: ROAD SIGNS. ( C3-4.) A.Objectives: : - Helps Ss to read a text about road signs to understand MUST & MUSTNT for obligation / prohibition. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail of the text talk about the obligation / prohibition. I.Knowledge: : - MUST & MUSTNT for obligation / prohibition. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: III.New lesson: TEACHER'S WORKS I.PRE-READING Time: 15M. 1. Vocabulary: - Matching. dangerous (adj); an accident (n); an intersection (n); (to) go fast (v); (to) warn us (v); (to) help us (v); (to) slow down (v); - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning by matching the words to the meaning & Corrects the pronunciation. 2. Wordsquare: - Introduces the wordsquare & asks Ss to work in STUDENTS' WORKS

- Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Giving the meaning by matching & the pronunciation & Correcting the mistakes.

- Working in groups to find out the 20 words related to the traffic.

88

groups to find out the 20 words related to the - Comparing & giving their prediction. traffic. R O A D S I G - Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction. W K O R X H I - Comments Ss the game. A C C I D E N * Answer key: R U C D R L O road signs; accident; travel; us; left; right; N R A E I P T go fast S T R A V E L truck T U S L E F T warn; stop; turn; car; ride; go; drive; O R I G H T O help; straight; dangerous. P N G O F A S 2. True / False prediction: - Introduces the statements & asks Ss to work in pairs to look at the pictures on page 90 & choose the correct statements for each one - Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction. - Comments Ss the game. a. Slow down b. Turn left Go straight Dont turn left e. Park here f. Cars & trucks go here Dont park here Motorbike go here II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M 3. Presentation text: C3 P90. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text & get the details & check the prediction. - Asks Ss to give the main idea of the text. - Corrects comments. * Answer keys: a. Slow down b. Turn left e. Dont park here f. Cars & trucks go here

N S T R A I G H T

D A N G E R O U S

- Working in individual to look at the picture in C4-P90 & choose the correct statement for each one. - Comparing & giving their prediction. c. Turn right Go straight or turn left g. Dont go straight Dont turn right or left d. Slow down Dont go straight ahead h. Park here Dont park here

- Reading the text & getting the details & checking the prediction - Giving the main idea of the letter. c. Go straight or turn left d. Dont go straight ahead g. Dont turn right or left h. Park here

III.POST- READING Time: 10 M 4. Word cue drill: C4-P91. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to - Repeating in chorus & in individual. practice. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to - Practicing in groups & in pairs . repeat in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the pronunciation. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. * Example exchange: - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in S1: What does this sign mean ? groups & in pairs . S2: You must [slow down]. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments.

89

IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M) - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework ( Time: 2M ): - Study the vocabulary & the content of the road signs. - Prepare for the grammar practice.

WEEK 17: Date of preparing: 6 /12 /2011 - Date of teaching: 7 / 12 / 2011. Period : 49 Grammar practice A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to further practice in Simple present vs. Present progressive. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use these grammars completely . I.Knowledge: : - Simple present vs. Present progressive. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II.Checking: III.New lesson: TEACHERS WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 10 M. 1. Revision: - Asks Ss to give the form & use of the Simple - Giving the form & use of the Simple present vs. present vs. Present progressive Present progressive. *Form: - Giving example. * Present simple: S + V-s / es + O. * Example * Use: Talk about things happen regularly. - I go to school. * Present progressive: S + tobe + V-ing. - I am going to school.: * Use: Talk about thing happening now. - Corrects & comments. II.PRACTICE Time 20 M . 1. Present progressive with I / She / He. * Chain game: - Introduces the topic & asks Ss to practice in groups, using the past simple to talk about their vacation. - Asks Ss to give the answers. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments.

- Practicing in groups, using the past simple to talk about their vacation. - Giving the answers. - Correcting the pronunciation. * Model sentences: S1: Im watching TV.

90

S2: She is watching TV & Im playing video games. S3: She is watching TV, he is playing video games & Im etc. 2. Present progressive with all persons * Complete the sentences: GP 2 P92. - Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to work in -Working in pairs to use the verbs in the pairs to use the verbs in the parentheses to parentheses to complete the sentences in present complete the sentences in present progressive. progressive. - Asks Ss to compare the keys. - Comparing the keys & give the keys. - Asks Ss to give the keys by repeating in chorus. - Correcting the keys. Then corrects Ss pronunciation. * Cues: * Answer keys: a. Minh.his bike. ( ride ) a. Minh is riding his bike. b. They for a bus. ( wait ) b. They are waiting for a bus. c. She TV. (watch ) c. She is watching TV. d. We soccer. ( play ) d. We are playing soccer. e. He to music. ( listen ) e. He is listening to music. f. They to school. ( walk ) f. They are walking to school. g. He to Hanoi. ( travel ) g. He is traveling to Hanoi. III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M. 3. Present simple vs. Present progressive: * Contrast: GP 5 P94. - Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to work in -Working in pairs to use the verbs in the pairs to use the verbs in the parentheses to parentheses to complete the sentences in present complete the sentences in present progressive & in progressive & in simple present. simple present. - Comparing the keys & give the keys. * Example: - Correcting the keys. - (play) They play volleyball everyday. Theyre playing volleyball now. - Asks Ss to compare the keys. - Asks Ss to give the keys - Corrects & comments. * Answer keys: (ride) She her bike to school. a. She rides her bike to school. She her bike now. She is riding her bike now. (go) We to school by bus everyday. b. We go to school by bus everyday. We to school by bus now. Were going to school by bus now. (walk) I to school everyday. c. I walk to school everyday. I to school now. Im walking to school now. (drive) He his truck. d. He drives his truck. He his truck at the moment. Hes driving his truck at the moment IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the lesson. V.Homework ( Time: 2M ): - Study the grammar & the modal sentence & do the exercises at home. - Prepare for the grammars: Preposition of places; Must & Can; & Questions word for the next grammar practice: 3- 4- 6 7/ P 93-94..

91

WEEK 17 Date of preparing: 7 /12 /2011 - Date of teaching: 8 / 12 / 2011. Period : 50 Review(1) A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to further practice with making suggestions, arrangements & accepting the invitation. By the end of the lesson, Ss can use these grammars correctly. I.Knowledge: : - Making suggestions, arrangements & accepting the invitation II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson Teacher's activities Students'activities 1. Present simple tense. a. With (to) be:(20ms) -T asks ss to remember the way to use the structure,use. -Ss remember and answer the -T calls some ss to go to the board and write. question of teacher. -T controls and corrects with ss. -T asks Ss to give the structures and the way to use them. Structure: Khng nh: S + (to) be +(a/an) + O. Ph nh: S + (to) be-not +(a/an) + O. Nghi vn:(to) be + S +a/an + O ?. -Ss give examples. Tr li: Yes, S + (to)be + He is a teacher. No, S + (to) be-not + Nam isnot a student. + Is she tall? -T asks ss to give more example Yes, she is/ No, she isnt. b.Example: ...etc 1.They are students. - Ss take notes. 2.He isnot an engineer. 3. Are they students ? Yes, they are. No, they arent T controls and corrects. - Ss copy the notes and learn by Notes: heart. I + am = Im She,He,It + is = shes; hes; its You, They, We + are = youre; theyre; were. 2.Exercise: -T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the exercises. -T asks ss the way to do. - T calls ss to go to the board write the answer. Practicing in groups. 92

-T comment and correct. a.in am, is, are vo trng.(10ms) 1. He....................a nurse. 2.They ..........................doctors. 3.Peter.....................a student. 4.I........................small but my father..............big. 5.Miss Mai.....................always early. 6. We................ teachers and they ..................workers. b. Change 6 sentences into negative sentenses.(10ms) Example: 1. He isnt a nurse. 2.They are not doctors. 3.Peter is not a student. ......etc.

-Expected: 1. He is a nurse. 2.They are doctors. 3.Peter is a student. 4.I am small but my father is big. 5.Miss Mai is always early. 6. We are teachers and they are workers. -Ss go to the board write the answer. - Correcting the answer keys.

Practicing in groups. -Ss go to the board write the answer Example: - Introduces the way to practice & devides the class into 2 1. He isnt a nurse. groups to practice. 2.They are not doctors. - Helps Ss to practice. 3.Peter is not a student. -Calls ss to go to the board to write the answer. - Corrects & comments - Correcting the answer keys. IV. Consolidation.(1ms) -T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check. V.Homework.(1ms) -Preparing the simple present tense .

WEEK 17: Date of preparing: 11 /12 /2011 - Date of teaching: 12 / 12 / 2011. Period : 51 Review(2) A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to further practice with making suggestions, arrangements & accepting the invitation. By the end of the lesson, Ss can use these grammars correctly. I.Knowledge: : - Making suggestions, arrangements & accepting the invitation II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson Teacher's activities 93 Students'activities

1.Present simple tense. a. With regular verbs.:(20ms) -T asks ss to remember the way to use the structure,use. -T calls some ss to go to the board and write. -T controls and corrects with ss. -T asks Ss to give the structures and the way to use them. Structure: Khng nh: S + V(s/es) + O. Ph nh: S + dont/doesnt + V(inf) + O. Nghi vn: Do/ Does + S + V(inf) + O ?. Tr li: Yes, S + do/does No, S + dont/ doesnt. -T asks ss to give more example b.Example: 1.They play chess. 2.He works in a hospital. 3. Does nam like oranges? Yes, he does No, he doesnt. T controls and corrects. Notes: She,He,It + V(s/es) You, They, We + V(inf) 2.Exercise: a.Put the following verbs in simple presnt.(20ms) -T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the exercises. -T asks ss the way to do. - T calls ss to go to the board write the answer. -T comment and correct. 1. The swimming bath..................(open) at 9:00 and ..............(close) at 18:30 every day. 2.I have a car but I.................(not-use) it very often. 3.I.......................(play) the piano, but I................... (not-play) very well. 4.I dont understand the worddecide. What.........................(decide/ mean)? 5.I ............................(work) in a bank. Nam.........................(work) in an office

-Ss remember and answer the question of teacher.

-Ss give examples. + He teaches in a school.. + Nam doesnt play volleyball.. + Do you want to learn English? Yes, I do/ No,I dont. ...etc - Ss take notes.

- Ss copy the notes and learn by heart.

Practicing in groups.

-Expected: 1. opens........closes 2.dont use 3.play.........dont play. 4.does the decide mean? 5.work..........doesnt work...... -Ss go to the board write the answer. - Correcting the answer keys. keys.

IV. Consolidation.(2m) -T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check. V.Homework.(2m) 94

-Preparing the simple present tense .

WEEK 18 Date of preparing: 13/12 /2011 - Date of teaching: 14 / 12 / 2011. Period :52 Review(3) A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to consolidate the grammars to prepare for the first final semester test. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidate the grammar to prepare for the first final semester test. I.Knowledge: : - Making suggestions, arrangements & accepting the invitation II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson TEACHERS WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Gaps fill: 1 / P 40. -Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work - Working in individual to fill in the gaps. in individual to fill in the gaps. -Comparing in pairs & giving the information. -Asks Ss to compare in pairs. *Answer keys: -Asks Ss to give the information. 1./ am am are is are. -Corrects & comments. 2./ am is is are are. 3./ a) are am; b) is is. c) is isnt ; d) are arent. 2. Noughts & Crosses: -Introduces the game & helps Ss to play in - Playing in two groups. two groups by choosing the cue & making They/teachers We/students She/a nurse question. He/an engineer I/a student They/sister -Corrects & comments the game. You / 12 We/brothers She/a doctor II.PRACTICE Time 10 M . 3. Present progressive : - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. - Reading the text in silence. - Asks Ss read the text in silence. - Practicing in groups & in individual. - Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss to -Correcting the pronunciation. practice in groups & in individual. *Model sentence: - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. I m [am] playing games - Introduces the form & use of the grammar. He/ She s [ is] riding a bike. * Present progressive : driving. + Form: I/ He/ She + tobe + V-ing. We/ you/ re (are) playing they. We/ You/ They + Use: Talk about things happening now.. 95

III.PRODUCTION Time: 15 M. 4. Yes / No question Answer drill: A6-P55. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. 3. Find someone who: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in groups using the example exchange to ask & answer about the place where they live & fill the name into the table. - Asks Ss to compare & report the information. - Comments Ss information.

* Example exchange: (Picture on P36) S1: Do you / they play volleyball ? S2: Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they dont. S1: Does she / he play soccer ? S2: Yes, she / he does; No, she / he doesnt - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation.

- Working in groups using the example exchange to ask & answer about the place where they live & fill the name into the table. - Comparing & reporting the information. * Example exchange: S1: Do you live in town ? S2: No, I dont. / Yes, I do. S1: What your name ? S2: My name is S1: How do you spell it ? Name

Find someone who lives in town in the country near a lake next to a market opposite a paddy field near a post office IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ) - Asks Ss to summarize the lesson. V.Homework ( Time: 2M ): - Study the grammar & the modal sentence re-do the test at home. - Prepare for the First final semester test. C.Can improved: ................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................... WEEK 18: Date of preparing: 14 /12 /2011 - Date of teaching: 15 / 12 / 2011. Period : 53 Review(4) 96

A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to consolidate the grammars to prepare for the first final semester test. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidate the grammar to prepare for the first final semester test. I.Knowledge: - The present progressive tense. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson Teacher's activities Students'activities a.Structure:(10ms) -T asks ss to remember the way to use the structure,use. -T calls some ss to go to the board and write. -Ss remember and answer the question of -T controls and corrects with ss. teacher. -T asks Ss to give the structures and the way to use them. Form: Khng nh: S + (to) be +V-ing + O. Ph nh: S + (to)be-not + V-ing+ O. -Ss give examples. Nghi vn: (to) Be + S + V-ing + O ?. + He is teaching in a school at the moment. Tr li: Yes, S + (to)be + Nam isnt playing volleyball at present... No, S + (to)be-not + Are you studying now? Use: Din t mt hnh ng ang xy ra ti thi Yes, I am/ No, I am not. im ni. ...etc *Thng dng vi cc trng t nh: - Ss take notes. Now, right now, at the moment, at present. -T asks ss to give more example b.Example: 1.They are playing chess now. 2.He is working in a hospital now. - Ss copy the notes and learn by heart. 3. Is Nam doing his homework? Yes, he is No, he isnt T controls and corrects. Notes: Practicing in groups. I+ am + V-ing She,He,It + is + v-ing You, They, We + are + v-ing 2.Exercise: a.Put the following verbs in present progressive -Expected: tense.(20ms) 1. is opening -T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the exercises. 2.are playing -T asks ss the way to do. 3.isnt working - T calls ss to go to the board write the answer. 4.is working -T comment and correct. 5.is snowing 97

1. The swimming bath..................(open) now 2.They.......................(play) the piano now 3.Lan............................( not-work) in a bank at the moment 4. Nam.........................(work) in an office at present. 5.Look! It............................(snow). b. Use the verbs given in present progressive tense to complete the following sentences.(12ms) -T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the exercises. -T asks ss the way to do. - T calls ss to go to the board write the answer. -T comment and correct. read rain become Shine get listen 1.The cost of living..................higher. 2.George now can speak French fluently. His French............................better. 3.Keep silent, please. I....................to the teacher. 4.We can go out because it..................... 5.Wheres your father? He.........................a newspaper in his room. 6.Its very hot today. The sun.......................above.

-Ss go to the board write the answer. - Correcting the answer keys.

Practicing in groups. -Ss go to the board write the answer

Example: 1. is becoming 2.is getting 3. am listening 4. is raining 5. is reading 6. is shining - Correcting the answer keys.

IV. Consolidation.(2ms) -T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check. V.Homework.(1ms) -Preparing the present progressive tense

The first term examination Time: 45minutes Period: 54 WEEK 19 Date of preparing: 8 /1 /2012 - Date of teaching: 9 / 1 / 2012. Period : 55 Unit 9: the body Lesson 1: parts of the body.( A1-2) A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in nouns to talk about the parts of the body. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the parts of their body. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: 98

I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision Asks Ss some questions about the function of their parts of the body. ? What does your head/ hands/ legs/ for ? - Corrects Ss answers & comments. III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: his head / chest; his shoulders/ arms / hands legs/ feet / fingers / toes. - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then - Correcting the mistakes. helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the - Copying the words. mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Rub out and Remember: - Reading the words to remember. - Introduces the words & helps Ss to read to - Rewriting the words in the circle. remember. - Correcting the pronunciation & the mistakes. - Erasers the words in un-order & asks Ss to read. - Asks Ss to rewrite the words in the circle his head his chest; his toes. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. his shoulders his arms his hands his legs II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M. 3. Picture drill: A1 - P 96. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. his feet his fingers

- Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation * Example exchange: A2-P97. S1: What is that ? S2: That is his head. S1: What are those ? S2: Those are his shoulders.

III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M 3. Wordsquare: - Introduces the word-square & asks Ss to work - Working in groups to find out the hidden words. 99

in groups to find out the 14 hidden words. - Giving the words in two groups by Asks Ss to give the words in two groups by words & put them into a present circling the words & put them into a present statement & write on the board. progressive statement & write on the board. - Corrects & Comments the game. H E A D O X W A K L A C T F * Answer keys: T R A V H A O HEAD; FINGER;SHOULDER F I N G E R O HANDS; FOOT. H D R I S M T Q E M A T S T ARMS; LEGS; CHEST; TOES O R R H A N D S H O U L D E IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & example exchange. - Exercise: A1- P84. Workbook. - Read the text A3 P97 at home & prepare the pictures on P97. WEEK 19 Date of preparing: 10 /1 /2012 - Date of teaching: 11 / 1 / 2012. Period : 56 Unit 9: the body Lesson 2: parts of the body.( A4,5,6,7 )

circling the progressive T E W T O E S R

A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in adjectives to describe physical appearance. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe theirs physical appearance. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision Hang man. - Introduces the symbols & asks Ss to give the letters to form the words. - Corrects Ss answers & comments. III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS ------- ( fingers) ----- (chest) ---- (arm) ---- (feet) ---- (legs)

100

I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: tall short (adj); fat thin (adj); heavy light (adj). - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Noughts & Crosses: - Introduces the cues & divides the class into two groups to play the game. - Corrects & Comments the game. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments.

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

- Playing the game. - Corrects & Comments the game. tall big small thin quiet light

Fat Short heavy

II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M. 3. True / False repetition drill: A4 P98. - Reads the cues & asks Ss to repeat in chorus if the cue is true & keep silent if the cue is false. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. * Teacher: P. a: Shes thin Shes tall P. b: Hes thin Hes short Hes fat P. c: Hes small Hes tall Hes heavy P. d: Shes thin Shes tall Shes short III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M 3. Prediction: A4 P98. - Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to work in individual to predict the adjectives to fill in. - Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction . - Helps Ss to listen to the tape & check their prediction. - Corrects & Comments Ss prediction. 4. Grid: With answer keys. - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to listen to the tape & write the order of the people described. - Asks Ss to compare & give their information. - Corrects & Comments Ss information.

- Repeating if the cue is true & keep silent if the cue is false. - Correcting the pronunciation * Student: Repeat Silent Silent Silent Repeat Repeat Repeat Silent

Shes fat

Repeat Repeat Repeat

Repeat

- Working in individual to predict the adjectives to fill in. - Comparing & give their prediction. * Answer: Pa. Thin / light; Pb. Fat / heavy. Pc. Tall / heavy; Pd. Short / fat.

- Listening to the tape & writing the order of the people described. - Comparing & giving their information. 101

Tall ? short ? thin ? fat ? Listen Picture a ( thin - tall ) 4 Picture b ( short fat ) 3 Picture c ( tall fat ) 2 Picture d ( short fat ) 1 IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & example exchange. - Exercise: A3 & 4- P84. Workbook. - Prepare the pictures on P100. WEEK Date of preparing: 11 /1 /2012 - Date of teaching: 12 / 1 / 2012. Period : 57 Unit 9: the body Lesson 3: faces(B1) A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in face vocabulary ( nouns & adjectives )to describe peoples faces. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe their faces. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision Pelmanism. - Introduces the words & asks Ss to choose the pairs of antonym adjectives. FAT TALL HEAVY THIN SHORT LIGHT Corrects Ss answers & comments. III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS BIG NOISY SMALL QUIET

STUDENTS' WORKS

102

I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: ROR. his eyes/ ears/ lips/ teeth his hair/ nose/ mouth. - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Slap the board. - Introduces the picture of the peoples face & divides the class into two groups to play the game. - Corrects & Comments the game. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments.

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

- Playing the game. - Commenting the game.

His eyes

his hair

His nose His lips his teeth his ear

II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M. 3. Presentation text: B1 100. - Introduces the six pictures on page 100 (a f) & - Practicing in individual. helps Ss to practice. - Correcting the pronunciation. - Checks Ss practicing in individual. Model sentences: - introduces the model sentence. a round face - an oval face - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. full lips - thin lips long hair - short hair

103

III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M. 4. Word square. - Introduces the wordsquare & divides the class - Finding out the 17 into two groups & asks them to find out the 17 square. hidden words in the square. - Giving the words. - Asks Ss to give the words. H A I - Corrects & comments. N E F * Answer key: E O Y hair; fat; see; the; mouth; out; heavy. A B S ear; arm; near; toe; to; feet; R T H teeth; fingers. M O U nose; eye. H E A IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2m ) - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework: ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary. - Exercise: B1 & 2- P85. Workbook. - Prepare the pictures on P101.

hidden words in the R A F E E T V X T E E T H Y P I N G E R S

WEEK 02 Date of preparing: Period : 58

1 / 2 /2012 - Date of teaching:

2 / 2 / 2012.

Unit 9: THE BODY Lesson 4: faces(B2,B3,B4 ) A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in adjectives of color to describe features. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe their features. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision 5 Jumbled words. - Gives the jumbled words & asks Ss to put the letters into the right order to form the correct words. Yees = eyes; hari = hair; cefa = face; Spli = lips dreshouls = shoulders. sone = nose 104

Corrects Ss answers & comments. III. New lesson : 3. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: ROR. B2.P101. black; gray; red; blue; brown; white; yellow; green - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Finding friends: - Introduces the requirements & the table then asks Ss to make sentences: She has brown hair. She has green eyes. Etc - Asks Ss to go to the board & take note their friends appearances & Comments . She/ has eyes black gray blue White Brown red green. II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M. 3. Dialogue build: B3 101. - Read the dialogue & presents the symbols for the words & asks Ss to repeat to remember the dialogue. - Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Asks Ss to build the dialogue. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments.

STUDENTS' WORKS

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

- Making sentences: She has brown hair. She has green eyes. Etc - Going to the board & taking note their friends appearances. hair lips teeth

- Repeating the dialogue to remember. - Practicing the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Building the dialogue. - Correcting the pronunciation & building the dialogue. * Dialogue: Hoa: I have a new doll. Mai: What color is her hair ? Hoa: Its black. Mai: What color are her eyes ? Hoa: They are brown.

105

III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M. 2. Picture drill: B3/ P 101. - Introduces the example exchange & the pictures - Repeating in chorus & in individual. then helps Ss to practice. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to - Practicing in groups & in pairs . repeat in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the pronunciation. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. * Example exchange: - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in S1: What color is her hair ? groups & in pairs . S2: Its black. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. S1: What color are her eyes ? * Note: Using pictures of the four dolls on page 101. S2: They are brown. IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & the model sentences. - Prepare the pictures on P 100 & 101 for B1 4 5 _________________________________________________________________________

WEEK 02 Date of preparing: 2 /2 /2012 - Date of teaching: 3 / 2 / 2012. Period : 59 Unit 9: THE BODY Lesson 5: Faces(B5,B6,B7 ) A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to further practice in body vocabulary to describe people. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use body vocabulary to describe people. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision : ( 5 ) Two Ps go to the board to write new words and structure about the colour. III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRE-READING Time: 10 M. 1. Vocabulary: ROR. round a round face; oval an oval face full/ thin full/ thin lips; long/ short long/ short hair. 106

- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Prediction: B4 P 101. - Introduces the close text & asks Ss to work in pairs to predict the information to fill in the gap. - Asks Ss to give their information. - Comments the information. * Answer key: * Miss Chi is tall and thin. She has a round face, long black hair, brown eyes, a small nose, thin lips and small white teeth. II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M 3. Presentation text: B4 - P101. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the texts about Miss. Chi & correct their prediction. - Asks Ss to compare their information. - Corrects comments. 4. Comprehension questions: B1 P76. - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to ask & answer the - Helps Ss to correct & comments. * Questions: a. Is Miss. Chis hair long or short ? b. What color are her eyes ? c. Are her lips full or thin ? d. What color is her hair ? e. Is her nose big or small ?

- Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

- Working in pairs to predict the information & filling in the gap. - Giving the information. - Commenting the information. * Miss Chi is ___ and thin. She has a ___ face, ___ ___ hair, ___ eyes, a ___ nose, ___ lips and small ___ teeth. -Reading the texts about Miss. Chi & correcting their prediction. - Comparing their information. - Working in pairs to ask & answer the questions. - Correcting the answer keys & Commenting. * Answer keys: A. Chis hair is long. B. Her eyes are brown. C. They are full. D. Her hair is black. E. Her nose is small.

III.POST- READING Time: 10 M 5. Survey: - Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work in - Working in pairs to asks & answer something pairs to asks & answer something about about themselves & take note into the table. themselves & take note into the table. - Giving their information. - Asks Ss to give their information & comments. My partner My Mum My Dad My Brother My Sister Body Thin Face Round Hair Short - black Eyes Etc Nose IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M) 107

- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & the content of the texts. - Exercise: write a short paragraph to describe people using the survey. - Prepare the pictures on page 104 & 106. WEEK 02 Date of preparing: 3 /2 /2012 - Date of teaching: 4 / 2 / 2012. Period : 60 Unit 10: STAYING HEALTHY Lesson 1: How do you feel? (A1,2,3,4 ) A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in talking about how we feel using adjectives of Physical state. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about how we feel. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision ( 5 M ) : Picture cues. - Asks Ss to work in pairs, take it in turn to point at the different picture on page 104-105 & ask and answer. Using the exchange: S1: Whats this color ? S2: Its green. - Corrects & comments. III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 10 M. 1.Vocabulary: hungry (adj); thirsty (adj); full (adj); tired (adj); hot (adj); cold (adj); - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Matching: - Presents the words & the meaning into two column then asks Ss to work in individual to match the word to its meaning. STUDENTS' WORKS

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. -Copying the words.

- Working in individual to match. hungry (adj); l nh thirsty (adj); nng full (adj); i

108

- Corrects & comments.

tired (adj); hot (adj); cold (adj);

kht mt no

II.PRACTICE Time: 20 M. 3. Word cue drill: - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments.

4. Picture drill: A1-P104 + A5-P106 - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. * Example exchange: - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to S1: How does he/she feel ? repeat in chorus & in individual. S2: He/she is [ hungry]. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. S1: How do they feel ? - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in S2: They are [ hungry]. groups & in pairs . - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation. 5. Matching: - Introduces the requirements & asks Ss to listen - Listening to the tape & matching the right name to the tape & match the right name with the with the pictures on page 106. pictures on page 106. - Comparing & giving their matching. - Asks Ss to compare & give their matching. - Helps SS to correct & comments. III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time 5 M 4. Guessing game: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to write - Writing their physical state on a piece of paper their physical state on a piece of paper then ask then ask the other to guess. the other to guess. - Playing the game. - Helps Ss to play the game. * Example exchange: -Corrects & comments. S1: Are you thirsty ? S2: No, Im not. S1: Are you hot ? IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ): - Asks Ss to give the way to ask & answer about their physical state. S1: How do you feel ? S2: Im [ hungry]. S1: How does he/she feel ? S2: He/she is [ hungry]. S1: How do they feel ? S2: They are [ hungry]. 109

* Example exchange: S1: How do you feel ? S2: Im [ hungry]. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation. HUNGRY THIRSTY HOT COLD TIRED FULL

V.Homework ( Time: 2M ): - Study the model sentences & the vocabulary. - Exercise: 1-P87. Workbook. - Prepare the picture on page 105 & what you like to eat or drink. WEEK 03: Date of preparing: 8 / 2 /2012 - Date of teaching: 9 / 2 / 2012. Period : 61 Unit 10: STAYING HEALTHY Lesson 2: How do you feel? (A5,6,7,8 ) A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to read a dialogue to recognize polite offers & requests with What would you like ? & Id like some/ a/ to. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to recognize the polite offers & requests. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision : ( 5 ) - Calls two Ps go to the board to ask and answer some questions about feeling. - Corrects mistakes, remarks and gives marks. III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRE-READING Time: 15 M. 1. Vocabulary: Some Orange Juice = A Drink (N); Some Noodle (N); (To) Like . (To) Want = Would Like; - Introduces the words by explaining the - Repeating The Words In Chorus & In meaning, using the situation. Individual. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then - Correcting The Mistakes. helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Giving The Meaning & The Pronunciation. - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the - Copying The Words. mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Predict Dialogue: - Introduces the open dialogue & asks Ss to work - Working In Pairs To Predict The Suitable in pairs to predict the suitable words to fill in the Words To Fill In The Gaps To Complete The gaps to complete the dialogue. Dialogue. - Asks Ss to give their prediction. - Giving Their Prediction. - Comments their prediction. * Open Dialogue: Nam: How Do You Feel ? 110

Lan: Im And Nam: What would you like ? Lan: Id like some What about you ? Nam: Im Id like some II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M 3. Presentation dialogue. A3-P105. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the dialogue between Nam & Lan & get the details. - Asks Ss to check their prediction. - Corrects comments. 4. Matching: - Introduces the poster & asks Ss to read the dialogue again & match the key words to the people. - Asks Ss to compare & give the keys. - Helps Ss to correct & comments. Hot Lan Tired hot Thirsty Full Hungry Noodles A drink To sit down III.POST- READING Time: 5 M 5. Mapped dialogue: - Introduces the dialogue & helps Ss to read to remember. - Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Asks Ss to complete the dialogue. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. fell ? like ? thirsty orange juice. cold + hungry some noodlesfell ? like ? - Reading the dialogue. - Checking their prediction.

- Working in pairs to read the dialogue again & matching the key words to the people. - Comparing & giving the keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting Nam Ba

- Reading the dialogue to remember. - Practicing the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Completing the dialogue.

* Example exchange: S1: How do you fell ? S2: Im cold and hungry. S1: What would you like ? S2: Id like some noodles. How do you fell ? S!: Im thirsty. S2: What would you like ? S1: Id like some orange juice.

IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson & give the form of the polite offers & requests with What would you like ? & Id like some/ a/ to. V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & the dialogue. - Exercise: 2-P87- workbook. - Prepare the pictures on page 110 & the menu. 111

_______________________________________________________________________________________ WEEK 03 Date of preparing: 9 / 2 /2012 - Date of teaching: 10 / 2 / 2012. Period :62 Unit 10: STAYING HEALTHY Lesson 3: Food and drink (B1-3) A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in Some / Any with There is / There are, positive, negative & Yes / No questions to talk about food & drink . By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use these grammars to talk about food & drink correctly. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. Some / Any with There is / There are, Positive, Negative & Yes / No questions II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision Networks. ( 5 ) - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to give the food & drink that they food Drink usually have. - Comments. rice meat Milk a drink III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 20 M. 1.Vocabulary: - ROR. an apple (n); an orange (n); a banana (n); some water (n). - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Dictation list: - Presents the words & the table then asks Ss to listen & put the words into the correct column. - Asks Ss to compare & giving their list. - Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments. * Teacher reads: An apple; An orange Rice; Water Milk Vegetables Meat; Noodle; Bread STUDENTS' WORKS

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. -Copying the words.

- Working in individual to list. A AN Banana An apple Hot drink An orange Cold drink

SOME Rice Water Milk Vegetables Meat; Noodle

112

Banana Hot drink; Cold drink - Listening & Practicing the dialogue 3. Presentation dialogue: B2-P109 -Correcting the pronunciation. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue * Model sentences: & introduces the model sentence. (+) There is some rice - Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups & in (?) Is there any rice ? pairs. (-) There isnt any rice. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. (+) There are some rice (?) Are there any rice ? (-) There arent any rice. - Ticking what for lunch on the list. 4. Comprehension: - Comparing & giving the key. - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to tick Meat Fruit what for lunch on the list. Rice Water - Asks Ss to compare & give the key. noodles Milk - Corrects & comments. II.PRACTICE Time 15 M 5. Picture drill: B1-P108 - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to Example exchange: practice. S1: Is there any ? - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to S2: Yes, there is some repeat in chorus & in individual. No, there isnt any - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. S1: Are there any ? - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in S2: Yes, there are some groups & in pairs. No, there arent any - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation. IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ): - Asks Ss to give the way to use Some / Any with There is / There are, positive, negative & Yes / No questions to talk about food & drink V.Homework ( Time: 2M ): - Study the model sentences & the vocabulary. - Exercise: 1-2-3 P91 &92. Workbook. - Prepare the picture on page 112 & what you like to eat or drink. _____________________________________________________________________________________ WEEK : 03 Date of preparing: 10 /2 Period :63 /2012 - Date of teaching: 11 / 2 / 2012. Unit 10: STAYING HEALTHY Lesson 4: Food and drink (B4-5-6 ) A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in uncountable & plural Food & Drink nouns, polite requests Id like some & polite offers What would you like ? . By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use 113

uncountable & plural Food & Drink nouns, polite requests Id like some & polite offers What would you like ? correctly. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. What would you like ? - Id like some II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision : ( 5 ) -Calls two Ps go to the board to make new sentences with Is there ? and Are there . ? III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: - ROR. some chicken/ fish/ meat/ rice fruit/ milk/ vegetable (a vegetable). - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then - Correcting the mistakes. helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the -Copying the words. mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Matching / Grid: - Working in individual to match. - Presents the tape & the table then asks Ss to listen & match the names of the people with what a b c d e f g h they would like. Nhan x x - Asks Ss to compare & giving their matching. Tuan x x - Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments. Huong x x Mai x x 2. Presentation dialogue: B4-P110. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & introduces the model sentence. - Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. - Listening & Practicing the dialogue -Correcting the pronunciation. * Model sentences: - Id like some chicken/ fish/ meat/ rice fruit/ milk/ vegetable

II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M. 3. Picture drill: B4-P110 & B5-P111. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss Example exchange: to practice. S1: What would you like ? - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to S2: Id like some [ fish ] repeat in chorus & in individual. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. 114

- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time 10 M 4. Chain game: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to talk about what they would like in turn. - Helps Ss to play the game. -Corrects & comments.

- Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation.

- Talking about what they would like in turn. - Playing the game. * Example: S1: Id like some fish. S2: Id like some fish & some vegetable. S3: Id like some fish & some vegetables & some orange juice. S4:

IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ): - Asks Ss to give the uncountable & plural Food & Drink nouns, polite requests Id like some & polite offers What would you like ?. V. Homework ( Time: 2M ): - Study the model sentences & the vocabulary. - Exercise: 1-2 P88. Workbook. - Prepare the picture on page 108 & what you like to eat or drink. _______________________________________________________________________________________ WEEK : 04 Date of preparing: 15 / 2 /2012 - Date of teaching: 16 / 2 / 2012. Period :64 Unit 10: STAYING HEALTHY Lesson 5: MY FAVORITE FOOD ( C 1-5). A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in speaking about favorite food & drink to contrast Would you like? & Do you like?. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their favorite food & drink. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. Would you like? & Do you like?. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision : ( 5 ) - Calls two Ps go to the board to say about what food their families members would like. - Remarks and gives marks. III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: - ROR. my favorite food/ drink; some carrots/ beans/ peas/ iced tea. 115

- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Picture drill: B1-P108 - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. 3. ROR dialogue: C2-P112. - Introduces the dialogue by giving the symbols for the words & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue. - Helps Ss to read the dialogue in chorus to remember. - Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Introduces the model sentence. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments.

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. -Copying the words.

* Example exchange: S1: What are these ? S2: They are beans. What are those? S1: They are carrots. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation. - Listening & Practicing the dialogue -Correcting the pronunciation. * Model sentences: S1: Do you like vegetables ? S2: Yes, I do. / No, I dont. S1: Would you like some vegetables ? S2: Yes, I would. / Yes, please. No, I wouldnt. / No, thank you

II.PRACTICE Time 10 M 4. Word cue drill: - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to Example exchange: practice. S1: Do you like [ beans ] ? - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to S2: Yes, I do. / [No, I dont ]. repeat in chorus & in individual. S1: Would you like some [ beans ] now ? - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. S2: No, thank you./ Yes, please. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation. beans peas carrots milk iced tea oranges rice apple III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M. 5. Survey: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work - Working in pairs to interview each other & in pairs to interview each other about their taking note the information into the table. favorite food & drink using the given question & - Reporting the information about their friends. take note the information into the table. - Asks Ss to report the information about their * Question: Do you like chicken ? friends using the model. * Feedback: Nam likes chicken & orange but he 116

- Corrects & comments. Name Likes Nam

doesnt like fish Chicken & orange Doesnt like Fish

IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ): - Asks Ss to contrast Would you like? & Do you like? V.Homework ( Time: 2M ): - Study the model sentences & the vocabulary. - Exercise: 4-5 92. Workbook. - Prepare the picture on page 114 & what you like to eat or drink. WEEK : 04 & 05 Date of preparing: Period :65

16

/2

/2012 - Date of teaching: 17 / 2 / 2012.

Unit 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT ? Lesson 1: At the store (A1) A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in quantifiers ( a kilo of) & containers ( a bottle of) to talk about people buy at the store. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about quantifiers & containers. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. Quantifiers & Containers. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision ( 5 ) - Calls one P go to the board to answer the question : How do you feel ? and Whats your favorite food ? - Remarks and gives mark III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: - ROR. some eggs/ chocolates; some oil/ beef/ soap/ toothpaste. - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then - Correcting the mistakes. helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the -Copying the words. mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Matching. - Working in individual to match the picture to - Introduces the phrases & the pictures then asks the correct word . 117

Ss to work in individual to match the picture to the correct word . - Asks Ss to compare their matching & match. - Corrects & comments.

grams of a kilo of a can of a bar of a box of a tube of a packet of a dozen a bottle of

II.PRACTICE Time 20 M 3. ROR dialogue: A1a-P114. - Introduces the dialogue by giving the symbols for the words & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue. - Helps Ss to read the dialogue in chorus to remember. - Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Introduces the model sentence. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. 4. Picture drill: A1b-P115. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. 5. Substitution drill: - Introduces the requirement & helps Ss to read the model then reads the substituted words & asks Ss to read the substitution sentence. - Asks Ss to practice in individual. - Corrects the pronunciation & comments. * Teacher reads: water; oil; soap; peas; beans; coke; chocolates; eggs; tea; noodles

- Listening & Practicing the dialogue -Correcting the pronunciation. * Model sentences: S1: Can I help you ? S2: Yes. A bottle of cooking oil, please. S1: Here you are. S2: Thank you.

* Example exchange: S1: Can I help you ? S2: Yes. A bottle of cooking oil, please. S1: Here you are. S2: Thank you. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation. - Reading the model & the substituted words Reading the substitution sentence. - Practicing in individual. - Correcting the pronunciation & the substitution. * Ss repeat: Id like a bottle of water, please. Id like a bar of soap, please.

IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the lesson. V.Homework ( Time: 2M ): - Study the model sentences & the vocabulary. - Exercise: 1-2 P.93. Workbook. - Prepare the picture on page 116 & Things on page 117. _________________________________________________________________________________________ 118

WEEK : 04 & 05 Date of preparing: Period :66

17 / 2

/ 2012 - Date of teaching:

18 / 2 / 2012.

Unit 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT ? Lesson 2: At the store (A2 + A3 ) A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to listen to a dialogue for specific information about quantities for food shopping. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail about quantities for food shopping. I.Knowledge: -Can I help you ?; (to) want; (to) need.; How much? (uncountable noun; How many? (countable noun).. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision : 5 Dictation lists: with "How much........?" " How many........?" T reads: oranges, meat, milk, bread, carrots, chocolates, beef, chicken, rice, eggs, apples, soap. Answer key: How much....?: meat, milk, bread, beef, chicken, rice, soap. How many....? :oranges, carrots, chocolates, eggs, apples III. New lesson : Teacher's works Students'works I.Presentation.(10ms) 1.Presentation dialogue. A2 P.116 -Ss read the dialogue and answer the From the dialogue, T sets a sence to give the model questions of the teacher. sentences. 1)I need/ want some beef. How much do you need/ want? -Ss give the concept check. 2)I need/ want some eggs. How many do you need/ want? II.Practice.(15ms) "Blackboard drill" T shows the way to ask ss practice well. -Ss read the key words and practice well. Example exchanges: S1:I need some beef. S2:How much do you want? S1:Three hundred grams, please. .......etc. -T controls and corrects. III.Production (10ms) "Role play"

Shopping list 300g. beef 1k rice 500g. beans 6 apples 1 dozen

119

-Ss practice in pair.

-Take notes. -Ss work in role to practice well.

T asks each ss writes a shopping list. In pair, ss take it in turns to be the storekeeper and the customer. Storekeeper Customer Can I help you? I want/ need.... How much/ I'd like.... many.....? Anything else? Do you have any....... That's....dong, .......please. please. .......Thank you ! -T corrects. IV. Consolidation.(2m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(2m) -Doing exercise : -Preparing: Unit 11: B1, 3-4 WEEK : 05 & 06 Date of preparing: Period :67

-Take notes.

22

/2 /2012 - Date of teaching: Unit 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT ? Lesson 3: at the store (A4,5 )

23

/ 2 / 2012.

A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to listen to a dialogue for specific information about quantities for food shopping. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail about quantities for food shopping. I.Knowledge: -Can I help you ?; (to) want; (to) need.; How much? (uncountable noun; How many? (countable noun).. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision : ( 5 ) - Calls two Ps go to the board to make a dialogue like part A2. - Remarks, corrects mistakes and gives marks. III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRE-LISTENING Time: 5 M. 1.True / False statement prediction: (Grid) - Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in - Working in pairs to predict which the pairs to predict which the statements is true or statements is true or false. false. - Comparing & Giving the keys. - Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys & 120

Comments big ? small ? a yard ? a well ? flowers ? trees ? II.WHILE-LISTENING Time: 5 M: 2. Presentation dialogue: A1-P72. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & get the details. - Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & check the prediction & Corrects. III.PRE-READING Time: 10 M. 3. Vocabulary: Slap the Board. a garden (n); a vegetable (n); a photo (n). - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 4.True / False statement prediction: - Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in pairs to predict which the statements is true or false. - Asks Ss to compare & give the keys & Comments.. * Answer keys: 1. T; 2. F; 3. F; 4. T;

Yes

No

- Listening to the dialogue & getting the details. - Listening to the dialogue & checking the prediction.

- Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

- Working in pairs to predict which the statements is true or false. - Comparing & Giving the keys. * Statements: 1. The house is in the country. 2. There is a river near the house. 3. Therere trees to the left of the house. 4. Therere two gardens.

IV.WHILE-READING Time: 10 M 5. Presentation text: A2-P73. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the letter & get - Reading the letter & get the details. the details. - Giving the main idea of the letter. - Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter. - Corrects comments. 6. Comprehension questions: A2/P73. - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in - Working in pairs to match the questions to the pairs to match the questions to the answers. answers. - Helps Ss to correct & comments. - Giving the answer keys. a. Is there a flowers garden in front of the - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting house ? A. Yes, it is. b. Is the house beautiful ? B. No, it isnt. 121

c. Is there a flowers garden behind the house? d. Is there a lake to the right of the house? e. Is Nga in the city ?

C. No, she isnt. D. Yes, there is.. E. No, there isnt. Answer: a D; b A; c E;

d E;

e C.

V.POST-LISTENING & READING Time:5 M 7. Transformation writing: - Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work in individual to change the underlined information to describe their own house & then draw a picture of it as a photo . - Asks Ss to give their information & comments.

- Writing in individual & giving the information. * My house: Theres a flowers garden in front of the house. Theres a vegetable garden behind the house. To the left of the house, theres a lake. To the right of the house, there are tall trees. Here is a photo.

IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homeworks ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & the content of the letter. - Prepare the picture on page 74. WEEK : 05 Date of preparing: Period :68 23 / 2 /2012 - Date of teaching: 24 / 2 / 2012.

Unit 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT ? Lesson 4: at the canteen (B1,2,3 ) A.Objectives: - Helps students will be able to practice in Offers and Requests for Food and Drink. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. Would you like? & Do you like?. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson : Teacher's activities Students'activities I.Practice. 1.Kim's game.(10m) B1 P.119. T asks Ss play it in team to taking it in turns to -Ss enjoy the game. fill up the lists on the board. -Ss play it in team to taking it in turns to fill up 122

- Asks Ss to give their information & comments. There's a.. There's There are some.... some.... -can of -rice - vegetables soda .... -milk -apples ...........etc .....etc. ........etc. -T corrects. 2.Matching.(10M) B4 P.120. T shows the way to ask ss to play. - Asks Ss to give their information & comments. a b c d e f g h i j k l 2 4 1 5 7 3 6 8 -T corrects. 3.Word cue drill.(10m) T shows the way to ask ss to practice well. - Asks Ss to give their information & comments. bread/ milk fish/ soda noodles/ water chicken/ iced tea rice/ orange juice beef/ vegetables/ lemonade Example exchanges: B2 P.120 S1:What would you like for breakfast? S2:I'd like some bread and some milk. ............etc. T controls and corrects. II.Production.(10m) - Asks Ss to give their information & comments. 1.Chain game S1: I'd like some fish. S2: I'd like some fish and some rice. S3: I'd like some fish and some rice and a coke. S4:......etc.

the lists on the board. - Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting

- Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting

- Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting -Ss read the word cues and practice well.

-Ss work in groups. - Working in groups to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting

IV. Consolidation.(2m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework (2m). -Doing exercise : B1-2 in the workbook. -Preparing: Unit 11: B5,6 WEEK : 05 & 06 123

Date of preparing: Period :69

23

/ 2 /2012 - Date of teaching: 24 / 2 / 2012. Unit 11 : WHAT DO YOU EAT ? Lesson : B4,B5, B6

A.Objectives: - Helps students will be able to talking about price for Food and Drink with " How much/ many................?" I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. How much/many...........? II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson : Teacher's activities Students'activities I.Presentaetion.(10ms) 1.Pre-teach. T elicits to teach vocab. -Guess the words- listen and repeat. -Fifty =50 - Giving the answer keys. -a hundred ( two hundred....) =100 ( 200) - Correcting the answer keys -a thousand ( two thousand....) = 1.000 ( 2.000) &Commenting -Seven thousand five hundred = 7.5000. 2.Checking vocab. -Slap the board. 100 250 200 6.200 5.000 -Ss enjoy the game.

II.Practice.(25m) 1.Blackboard drill. T shows the way to practice. 100 50 200 150 350 750 1.000 2.000 5.000 4.200 7.500 9.500 2.300 10.000 2.Noughts and crosses. 2.500 dong 500 dong 3.000 dong 4.800 dong 10.000 1.000 dong dong 1.200 dong 8.500 dong 5.000 dong Example exchange: S1: How much is it? S2: It's two thousand five hundred dong.

-Listen- understand and practice well. - Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting - Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting

124

*Pre-teach.P. 121 -a cake ( n) picture -a sandwich : (n) picture -a fried rice (n) axplaination -an iced cream (n) explaination. -a bowl of (n) picture. - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. *Picture drill. B5-6 P.121 Ex: S1: How much is a fried rice? S2: It's two thousand five hundred dong. ........etc. III.Production." survey"(5m) T asks ss to fill the survey according to Real price they know, not the price in the texbook. How a a an a a Tieng Anh 6 muc fried bo era rule scho h is rice wl ser r ol it ? of bag ..... .... ... ... ... 11.200 dong -T controls and corrects. IV. Consolidation.(2m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(2m) -Doing exercise : B3-4 in the workbook. -Preparing: Unit 11:Grammar practice

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. -Copying the words.

-Look at the picture and practice well. -Ss fill the survey according to Real price they know, not the price in the texbook.

THE END WEEK : 05 & 06 Date of preparing: Period :70 : A.Objectives: - Helps students will be able to further practice in Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies. I.Knowledge: - Simple present tense 125 24 / 2 /2012 - Date of teaching: 25 / 2 / 2012. Grammar practice

-Present progressive. -Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson : Teacher's activities I.Likes and Dislikes.(20ms) 1.Find someone who. T shows the way to ask ss to practice. - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. Find someone who..... Name ....likes fish Lan ....doesn't like chicken ... ....likes bread .... ....doesn't like rice .... ....likes milk ... ....doesn't like soda ... ...Doaesn't like vegetables. ... 2.Write it up. Grammar practice 2 P.122 with "a" "an" "some" - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. a: a sandwich, a banana... an: an orange, an ice cream.... some: some noodles, some fish.... -T corrects. 3.Guessing game. - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. Example: I'd like some milk. S1: Would you like a sandwich? Students'activities -Listen and practice. - Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting Epected: S1: Do you like fish? S2: yes, I do. S1: What your name? S2: My name's Lan. ....etc.

-Ss work individually- share with your partner. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting

-1 or 2 ss go to the boad then play the game. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting

126

S2: No, I wouldn't. S1: Would you like some milk? S2: yes, I would. ........etc. II Adjectives.(20ms) 1.Grammar practice 3 P.123. "Pelmanism" - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. T shows the way to practice. tall long hot fat heav weak y short short cold thin lihgt strong 2.Question words. Grammar pracrice 4 P.123 - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. 3.Present simple $ present progressive. Grammar practice 5 P.123. - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. 4.Quantifiers. "lucky number" 1.What does cooking oil come in? 2.What does tea come in? 3.L 4.What does soap come in? 5 What does soda come in? 6.L 7. What does iced tea come in? 8.What do noodles come in? -T corrects.

- Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting

-Ss play in groups ( 2 groups)

-Do the exercises.

-Ss enjoy the game.

-Take notes. IV. Consolidation.(2m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(2m) -Doing exercise : P.122-123 in the text book. -Preparing: Unit 12:A1-2 127

________________________________________________________________________________________ WEEK : 05 & 06 Date of preparing: 24 / 2 /2012 - Date of teaching: 25 / 2 / 2012. Period :71 Written test A.Objectives: - Helps students will be able students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from unit 9 to unit 11. I.Knowledge: - Simple present tense -Present progressive. -Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson : kim tra 1 TIT 04 mn ting anh 6 MA TRN Tn ch Thi 1 TIT Unit 9-11 Vn dng Nhn bit TNKQ I II Language focus 4c = 1 Grammar 8c 1 2. Vocabulary 4c 4c = 1 III. Reading 4c IV. Writing 2c Tng s cu: 18 Tng s im: 10 T l : 100% TL Thng hiu TNKQ TL 4c = 2 Cp thp TNKQ TL Cp cao TNKQ TL 12 c = 4 40% Cng

4c = 4 2c = 2 2c = 2 20%

4c = 4 40% 2c = 2 20% 18 c = 10 100%

8c = 2 20%

8c = 6 60%

128

 kim tra 1 TIT ( K II) mn ting anh 6 I. Hy chn t hoc cm t thch hp in vo ch trng. ( 2 m) 1. They go to school.....................................Monday. a. on a. goes a. a a. some a. a packet a. peas a. rice a. eyes b. in b. go b. some b. a c. at c. going c. any c. any b. a box b. soap b. banana b. hair d. for d. to go d. an d. one c. a dezen d. a bottle c. toothpaste c.orange c. shoes d. egg d. bags d. tea 2. We to work every day. 3. They needsoda. 4. Do you have..bananas? 5. I want.. of cooking oil. 6. Lan needs a bar of. 7. How much.. do you want? 8. What color is her .? II. Chia ng t trong ngoc cho cc cu sau.(2m) 1. Mr and Mrs Vinh. a new house. (want) 2. My sister a red car. (have) 3. I would.some milk. (like) 4. Look! She soccer. (play) III. c on vn sau v tr li. ng (T) hay sai (F). (4m) Mrs Huong is short and thin. She has long black hair. She has a round face. Her eyes are black. She has a small nose and thin lips. 1. Mrs Huong is tall and thin. 2. She has long brown hair. 3. She has thin lips. 4. She has black eyes. IV. Sp xp cc cu sau theo ng trt t. (2m) 129

1. color / what / eraser / your / is / ? 2. I / any / dont / beef / have Answer key: I. 1. a 2. b 3. b 4. c 5. b 6. b 7. a 8. b II. Chia ng t trong ngoc cho cc cu sau.(2m) Mi cu ng c : 0.25 1. want 2. has 3. like 4. is playing III. c on vn sau v tr li. ng (T) hay sai (F). (4m) Mi cu ng c : 1 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T IV. Sp xp cc cu sau theo ng trt t. (2m) Mi cu ng c : 1 1. What color is your eraser? 2. I dont have any beef. 130 Hy chn t hoc cm t thch hp in vo ch trng. ( 2 m) Mi cu ng c : 0.25

THE END WEEK : 05& 06 Date of preparing: Period :72 25 / 2 /2012 - Date of teaching: 26 / 2 / 2012.

Unit 12: sports and pastimes Lesson 1: What are you doing? (A1,2,3,4,5,6 ) A.Objectives: Helps Ss to practice in Present Progressive & sport vocabulary. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about what people are doing now. I.Knowledge: -Present progressive. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision . ( 5 ) Jumbled words. - Gives the jumbled words & asks Ss to put the letters into the right order to form the correct words. Torps = sport; bolfatol = football; belvalylol = volleyball; Mage = game; sucim = music; lietoseniv = television - Corrects Ss answers & comments. III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 10M. 1.Vocabulary: - ROR. (to) swim; (to) play badminton; (to) jog; (to) do aerobics; (to) skip; (to) play table tennis;. - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then - Correcting the mistakes. helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the -Copying the words. mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Dictation list: - Working in individual to list. - Presents the words & the table then asks Ss to 2 people 1 person listen & put the words into the correct column. - Asks Ss to compare & giving their list. - Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments. * Teacher reads: play football; jog; do aerobics; play tennis; play table tennis; play volleyball. 131

3. Presentation dialogue: A1-P124. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue - Listening & Practicing the dialogue & introduces the example exchange. -Correcting the pronunciation. - Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups & in pairs. *Example exchange: - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. S1: What are they doing? S2: Theyre playing soccer. S1: What is She / he doing ? S2: She / he skipping. II.PRACTICE Time 5 M 4. Picture drill: A1-P124. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss - Repeating in chorus & in individual. to practice. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to - Practicing in groups & in pairs. repeat in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the pronunciation. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in *Example exchange: groups & in pairs. S1: What are they doing? - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. S2: Theyre playing soccer. S1: What is She / he doing ? S2: She / he skipping. III.Further practice Time: 5 M 5. Noughts & Crosses: -Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in - Working in groups to choose the cue & make groups to choose the picture & make the question the question & the answer. & the answer. - Corrects & comments. *Example exchange: S1: Picture C. S1: What are they doing? S2: Theyre playing soccer. Picture C Picture A Picture B Picture F Picture D Picture E Picture H Picture G Picture I I.PRE-READING Time: 5 M. 1. Open predict: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work - Working in pairs to predict what sport Lan & in pairs to predict what sport Lan & Nam like (3 Nam like (3 each ). each ). - Giving Their Prediction. - Asks Ss to give their prediction. Lan Nam - Comments their prediction. 1. 1. 2. 2. 3. 3. II.WHILE-READING Time: 5 M 2. Presentation text. A4-P126. - Reading the text. - Checking their prediction. 132

- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text about Nam & Lan & get the details. - Asks Ss to check their prediction. - Corrects comments. - Working in pairs to answer the questions. 3. Comprehension questions: - Giving the answers & correcting. * Questions: - Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to work in a. Which sport does Lan play ? pairs to answer the questions. b. Does Lan play tennis ? - Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects. c. Which sport does Nam play ? d. Does Nam play table tennis ? * Answers: a. Lan swim, does aerobics & play badminton. b. No, she doesnt. c. Nam plays soccer, table tennis, & jogs. d, Yes, he does. III.POST- READING Time: 5 M 4. Picture drill: A3-P125. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss in the whole class & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. 5. Survey: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to ask each other about the sports they do & fill the information into the table. - Asks Ss to compare & report the information. - Comments Ss information. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups with teacher & in closed pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation

* Example exchange: S1: Which sport do you do ? S2: I [ play soccer ] & [ swim ]. - Working in pairs to ask each other about the sport they do & filling the information into the table. - Comparing& reporting the information. * Example exchange: S1: Which sport do you do ? S2: I swim. S1: What else ? S2: I play volleyball. S1: Do you play table tennis ? S2: Yes, I do. volleyball Table tennis

Name Hoa

Sport Swim

IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2m - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson V.Homework Time: 2m: 133

- Study the vocabulary & exchange. - Exercise: 3-4-P104- workbook. - Prepare the pictures on page 127& what you do in your free times.

WEEK : 06& 07 Date of preparing: Period :73

29 / 2 /2012 - Date of teaching: 1 / 3 / 2012. Unit 12: Sports and Pastimes Lesson 2: Free time (B1-3)

A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to write a short text about what they do in their free time. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write a short text about what they do in their free time. I.Knowledge: - Simple present tense -Present progressive. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision ( 5 ) T calls one P go to the board to answer the questions T remarks and gives mark III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS

134

I.PRE-WRITING Time: 20 M. 1.Vocabulary: free time; (to) go fishing; (to) go to the movie. - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the pictures on P78/79. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks Ss reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. -Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Picture drill: B1-P127. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks Ss practicing in groups & in pairs. - Corrects Ss pronunciation & comments. 3. Transformation writing - B1-P127. - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to change I to the name of people in the pictures. - Asks Ss to compare & give their writing. - Corrects & comments.

- Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.

- Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation. *Example exchange: S1: What does Phuong do in his free time? S2: He goes to the movie. - Working in pairs to change I to the name of people in the pictures. - Comparing & giving their writing. * Answer : a. Phuong goes to the movie. b. Ly watches TV c. Nam reads d. Lan listens to music. e. Tuan goes fishing. f. Long play video games. - Working in individual to write 3 things about what they do in their free time & putting all the sentences together on a poster. - Reporting the information. * Groups writing (poster). San, Thuy & Chinh watch Tv San & Chinh play football San goes fishing Thuy goes to the part & ply badminton Chinh listens to music

II.WHILE-WRITING Time: 15 M 4. Pyramid: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in individual to write 3 things about what they do in their free time & put all their sentences together on a poster. - Asks Ss to report their information. - Comments. * Example: + Individual writing: ( San writes ) I watch TV, I go fishing & I play football. ( Thuy writes ) I watch TV, I go to the park & I play badminton. ( Chinh writes ) I listen to music, I play football

135

& I watch TV. IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ) - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & exchange. - Exercise: 1-2-P104-105 workbook. - Prepare the pictures on page 128 & 129.

136

Date of preparation : 1 / 3 / 2012 Date of teaching : 2 / 3 / 2012 Week : 6 & 7 LESSON 4: B. FREE TIME. (B4, B5) I. Aims: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - Ask and answer about what others do in their free time. - Know how to use the question How of ten..? with once, twice 2. Language skill: - Practice listening skill. - Working in pairs, groups. 3. Attitude: - Help Ss to develop their activeness in communication when using a foreign language, especially in English. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher: - Text book, pictures, cassette... 2. Students: - Textbook, notebook. III. Procedure: Teacher and students activities 1. Warm up: (5 minutes) Complete the sentences: 1. What _____ Loan _____ in her free time?(do) She ______tennis.(play) 2. What _____they ____ in their free time?(play) They _____volleyball.(play) - In this lesson, we are going to learn about peoples diary and some adverbs of frequency. 2. Presentation: Introduction (10 minutes) - Present new words: - Listen and write the new + How often...? words in their notebooks. + once + twice a week + three times + four times - Read the new words first as model then ask - Listen and repeat. 137 Board presentation Period : 74

Answer key: 1. does / do plays 2. do /play play - Listen to T.

Ss to repeat after T. Practices (10 minutes) - Matching (With answer key): m tu we th fri sa su o e d u t n n Once a week Twice a week Three times a week - Present the model sentences. + How often does she go jogging? listen to music? She goes jogging once listens to music twice a week reads three times - Match.

- Listen and write the model sentences in their notebooks.

Further Practice (15 minutes) * Picture Drill (B5- P. 129- Lys dairy) - Ask Ss to practice in pairs asking and answering about Lys dairy actions like the model: How often does Ly ...? She ......... once a week. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Ask Ss to look at part B4- P.128 - Tell Ss to give the names of the entertainments. - Present the listening text. - Call some to give the answers in front of the class. - Read the text again to check the answers. Keys to exercise Tan: f Minh & Nam: e Lien: a Lan & Mai: b + Tan reads. + Minh and Nam play video games. + Lien watches TV. + Lan and Mai listen to music. 3. Consolidation: (3 minutes) 138 - Practice in pairs. S1: How often does Ly [go to school]? S2: She goes [six times]a week. - Practice in front of the class. Look at exercise B4 Name the intertainments. Listen and match. Give the answers.

- Listen again and check the answers.

- Listen and remember.

- Repeat the model sentences through Remember. 4. Homework: (2 minutes) - Write 5 sentences telling about your dairy actions. - Do exercises: 4- P. 105 5- P. 106 in the workbook. Date of preparation : 2 / 3 / 2012 Date of teaching : 3 / 3 / 2012 Week : 6 & 7 LESSON 5: C. HOW OFTEN? (C1, C2, C3, C4) I. Aims: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - Know how to use the frequency adverbs: always, usually, often, sometimes, never. 2. Language skill: - Practice listening skill. - Working in pairs, groups. 3. Attitude: - Help Ss to develop their activeness in communication when using a foreign language, especially in English. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher: - Text book, pictures, cassette... 2. Students: - Textbook, notebook. II. Procedure: Period : 75 - Write assignments.

139

140

Teacher and students activities 1. Warm up: (5 minutes) Make question for these sentences. a. She goes jogging once a week. b. He reads twice a week. c. We have English classes three times a week. d. He and his brother play tennis four times a week. - In this lesson we will learn how to use the adverbs of frequency and the question: How often...? 2. New lesson: Pre-Reading (10 minutes) - Present the adverbs of frequency: + always + usually + often + sometimes + never - Read the new words as model then ask Ss to repeat. While-Reading: (15 minutes) - Use the pictures with the text to match: (with answer key) 1. th diu = fly kites 2. ci lu = tent 3. i cm tri = go camping 4. i d ngoi = have a picnic - Ask Ss to practice reading the words three times. * Table grid (with answer key): How nev sometim ofte usual alway often er es n ly s do they... ...go to the zoo? ...go to the park? ...have a picnic? ...do sports 141 ...fly kites? ...go

Board presentation Answer key How often does she go jogging? How often does he read? How often do you have English classes? How often do he and his brother play tennis? - Listen to T.

- Listen and write the new words in their notebooks.

- Listen and repeat.

- Read the text silently and match

- Read aloud in chorus. - Read the text in then do the grid.

- Practice asking and answering in pairs:

LESSON 6: C. HOW OFTEN? (C5, C6) I. Aims: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - Know how to use the frequency adverbs: always, usually, often, sometimes, never fluently. - Talk about their outdoor pastime. 2. Language skill: - Practice listening skill. - Working in pairs, groups. 3. Attitude: - Help Ss to develop their activeness in communication when using a foreign language, especially in English. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher: - Text book, pictures, cassette... 2. Students: - Textbook, notebook. III. Procedure: Teachers activities 1. Warm up: ( minutes) - Call some Ss to read their answer in C4P.131 again in front of the class. - In this lesson we will continue learning about the adverbs of frequency. 2. Presentation: Pre-Reading (10 minutes) *Networks (with answer key) ride a bike have a picnic play games walking fly a kite - List the words. Students activities

- Read in front of the class. - Listen to T.

Pastimes in the country

go - Listen and write the new words in their notebooks. 142

- Present new words:

+ (to) wear + clothes + boots + a stove + overnight - Read the new words as model then ask Ss to repeat after T. While-Reading: (15 minutes) - Read the text C6- P. 132. - Ask Ss to read the text in silent and answer the questions a) - f) about the text. - Ask Ss to compare the answers with a partner. - Call some Ss to read the answers in front of the class. - Comment and give the correct answers. a. He likes walking. b. They always wear strong boots and warm clothes. c. He goes on the weekend. d. He usually goes with his friends. e. He often goes in the mountains. f. They take food, water, and a camping stove. Post- Reading (10 minutes) - Ask Ss to change the subject from Minh to I for the bad students. In addition, for the good students, change the subject Minh to I and add more information. 3. Consolidation: (3 minutes) - Repeat the content of the lesson. 4. Homework: (2 minutes) - Write the answers in 6- P. 132. - Do exercises: 3, 4- P.107 (in workbook)

- Listen and repeat.

- Listen to T. - Read the text then answer the questions. - Compare the answers with a partner. - Read in front of the class. - Listen and write the correct answers in their notebooks.

- Practice changing the subject.

- Listen and remember.

- Write assignments.

UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS 143

Composed date:

Teaching date:

Class: 6A1 Class: 6A2 Class: 6A3 Class: 6A4

Period: 79 LESSON 1: A. THE WEATHER AND SEASONS. (A1) TEST 15 I. Aims: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - Talk about the weather and seasons. 2. Language skill: - Practice listening skill. - Working in pairs, groups. 3. Attitude: - Help Ss to develop their activeness in communication when using a foreign language, especially in English. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher: - Text book, pictures, cassette... 2. Students: - Textbook, notebook. III. Procedure: Teachers activities 1. Warm up: (5 minutes) Put the words in blankets in the right place: a. We are busy on weekdays. (always) b. He goes home at six oclock. (usually) c. My father drinks coffee. (never) d. They have a picnic. (often) - Ask Ss to look at the book, page 134 and introduce the content of the lesson: the weather and seasons. 144 Students activities

Answer key: a. We are always busy ... b. He usually goes ... c. My father never drinks ... d. They often have.... - Look at the book and listen to T.

2. Presentation: Introduction (10 minutes) - Present new words: + the seasons + the winter + the spring + the weather + the summer + the fall ( autumn) + warm (ad) + hot (ad) + cool (ad) + cold (ad) - Read the new words first as model, and then ask Ss to repeat. - Present the text A1- P. 134. -Ask Ss to read the text. Practice (6 minutes) * Picture Drill (A1- P. 134) - Ask Ss to practice in pairs, asking about what people often do in different seasons and weather. - Listen and write the new words in their notebooks.

- Listen and repeat. - Listen to T. - Read the text.

- Call some pairs to practice in front of the class. Further Practice (4 minutes) + + + + - Ask Ss to make sentences using the cues: Hanoi/ cold/ winter. Sonla/ hot/ summer. Dalat/ cool/ summer. Vietnam/ warm/ fall. - Call some Ss practice aloud.

- Practice asking and answering in pairs: Example Exchange: S1: What do you often do in the summer? S2: I go swimming. S1: What do you usually when it is cold? S2: I stay at home and watch T.V - Practice in front of the class.

- Practice in pairs. Example Exchange: S: Hanoi is cold in the winter. - Practice in front of the class. - Do the test. Answer keys and points: I. 4Ps => 1P for each. 1. B 2. B 3. A

Test 15 minutes I. Choose one word that has opposite meaning to the word in capitals. 1. HOT A. tired B. cold C. dangerous D. white 2. HUNGRY A. thirsty B. full C. hot D. cold 3. BLACK A. white B. blue C. green D. red 145

4. TALL A. full B. short C. thin D. heavy II. Make question for the follwing answers. 1. She goes jogging once a week. 2. I often go fishing in my free time. 3. He is tired now.

4. B II. 6Ps => 2 for each. 1. How of ten does she go jogging? 2. What do you do in your free time? 3. How does he feel now?

3. Homework: (3 minutes) - Repeat the content of the lesson. 4. Homework: (2 minutes) - Learn the words by heart. Composed date: Teaching date: Class: 6A1 Class: 6A2 Class: 6A3 Class: 6A4 -Write assignments. - Listen and remember.

Period: 80 LESSON 2: A. THE WEATHER AND SEASONS. (A2, A3) I. Aims: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - Ask and answer about the weather. - Talk about what weather they like. 2. Language skill: - Practice listening skill. - Working in pairs, groups. 3. Attitude: - Help Ss to develop their activeness in communication when using a foreign language, especially in English. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher: 146

- Text book, pictures, cassette... 2. Students: - Textbook, notebook. III. Procedure: Teachers activities 1. Warm up: (5 minutes) Put the words in blankets in the right place: a. We go to school on weekdays. (never) b. He goes home at six oclock. (sometimes) c. My father drinks tea after meals. (always) d. They have a picnic. (never) - Continue the topic: weather and seasons with the question: What is the weather like? 2. Presentation: Introduction (15 minutes) - Present the text A2- P. 135. - Ask Ss to read the text. - Present the model sentences: Whats the weather like in the Spring? Summer? It is cold. hot * A3- P. 135 - Present the text A3- P. 135. - Present model sentences: + What weather do you like? I like hot weather. + Whats the weather like today? Its cold. Practice (10 minutes) - Ask Ss to practice asking and answering about the weather in picture A1- P.134 like the model sentences in A2- P. 135 - Practice asking and answering in pairs: Example Exchange: (A2 P. 135) S1: Whats the weather like in summer? S2: Its hot. - Practice in pairs. Example Exchange: - Listen to T. - Read the text. - Listen and write the model sentences in their notebooks. Students activities

Answer key: a. We never go ... b. He sometimes goes ... c. My father always drinks ... d. They never have.... - Listen to T.

* Picture Drill (A3- P. 135) - Continue asking Ss to practice in pairs, asking about the weather that they/ people in 147

the pictures like. - Call some pairs to practice in front of the class. Further Practice (10 minutes) - Ask Ss to make conversations using the cues: Hanoi? Cold Can tho? Hot You / like? Cold You / like? Hot

S1: What weather do you /they like? S2: I /They like hot weather. - Practice in front of the class.

- Make conversations. Example Exchange: S1: Whats the weather like in Hanoi? S2: Its cold. S1: Whats the weather like in Can tho? S2: Its hot. - Practice aloud.

- Call some Ss practice aloud. 3. Homework: (3 minutes) - Repeat the content of the lesson. 4. Homework: (2 minutes) - Learn the structures by heart. - Do exercise 1- P. 108 (in workbook) Composed date: Teaching date: Class: 6A1 Class: 6A2 Class: 6A3 Class: 6A4 -Write assignments. - Listen and remember.

Period: 81 LESSON 3: A. THE WEATHER AND SEASONS. (A4, A5) I. Aims: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - Ask and answer about what people do in different kinds of weather. 148

- How to use when. 2. Language skill: - Practice listening skill. - Working in pairs, groups. 3. Attitude: - Help Ss to develop their activeness in communication when using a foreign language, especially in English. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher: - Text book, pictures, cassette... 2. Students: - Textbook, notebook. III. Procedure: Teachers activities 1. Warm up: (5 minutes) Make completed sentences: 1. What / like / spring? 2. weather / hot / today. 3. What / like / summer? 4. She / like / cool weather. 5. You / like / cold weather? - Introduce new lesson: in this lesson we are going to learn about what people do in different weathers. 2. Presentation: Introduction (15 minutes) * Network do aerobics go fishing go jogging Pastimes fly kites listen to music go for a walk play video games read books play soccer watch TV go swimming play badminton play volleyball * Predict - Give some adjectives descibing the weather and guess about Bas actions in each season: a) hot? E.g: He goes camping. b) cold? 149 - List the words. Students activities Answer key: 1. Whats the weather like in spring? 2. The weather is hot today. 3. Whats the weather like in summer? 4. She likes the cool weather. 5. Do you like the cold weather? - Listen to T carefully.

- Guess Bas actions in each season.

c) cool? d) warm? * Presentation Text (A4- P. 136) - Read the text A4. - Presents model sentences: What does he do when its hot? do you He goes I go swimming.

- Listen and check their guessing. - Listen and write the model sentences in their notebooks.

Practice (10 minutes) - Ask Ss to practice asking and answering in pairs using the cued words: Cold/ go jogging? Cool/ do aerobics? Hot/ go swimming? Warm/ go to the park? - Call some Ss to practice in front of the class. Further Practice (10 minutes) * Transformation writing (A4- P. 136) - Ask Ss to change subject Ba in the text to subject I to write the full sentences. - Change subject. Example: When its hot, I go swimming. When its cold, I play soccer. When its cool, I go jogging. When its warm, I go fishing. - Practice in pairs: Example: S1: When its cold, do you go jogging? S2: Yes, I do./ No, I dont. - Practice in front of the class.

3. Consolidation: (3 minutes) - Listen and remember. - Read and take notes the part Remember 4. Homework: (2 minutes) - Write assignments - Do exercises:1- P.110 ; 2- P. 112 (in workbook) Composed date: Teaching date: Class: 6A1 Class: 6A2 Class: 6A3

150

Class: 6A4 Period: 82 LESSON 4: B. ACTIVITES IN SEASONS. (B1, B2) I. Aims: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - Use the adverbs of frequency more fluently. 2. Language skill: - Practice listening skill. - Working in pairs, groups. 3. Attitude: - Help Ss to develop their activeness in communication when using a foreign language, especially in English. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher: - Text book, pictures, cassette... 2. Students: - Textbook, notebook. III. Procedure:

151

Teachers activities 1. Warm up: (5 minutes) Matching Always Usually Often Sometimes Never - Introduce new lesson by asking Ss to look at the pictures in the book- page 138 and guess what sports people play in different weather. 2. Presentation: Introduction (15 minutes) * Pre teach + (to) play basketball + (to) go sailing - Read the new words as model then ask Ss to read again in chorus. * Presentation Text - Read the text B1- P. 138 - Ask Ss to read the text again. Practice (10 minutes) - Write the action for each picture. Answer Given: a) We often play volleyball. b) They sometimes go sailing. c) I often go swimming. d) She always plays badminton. e) We always play basketball. - Practice in pair asking about pictures a)- f) using the sentences in Answer Given to make the questions: Answer Key: a) What do you do in the spring? b) What do they do in the fall? c) What do you do in the summer? d) What does she do in the fall? e) What do you do in the winter? Production (10 minutes) Board Drill - Ask Ss to practice asking and answering in pairs about the activities in Brainstorm

Students activities

- Match.

- Look at the book and give out their guessing in Vietnamese.

- Listen and write the new words in their notebooks. - Listen and repeat. - Listen to T. - Read the text.

- Write

- Practice asking in pairs: Example Exchange: S1: What [do you do in the spring]? S2: We [often play volleyball.]

- Practice in pairs. Example Exchange: S1: What do you do in the [summer]? S2: I [usually play in the park]. - Practice in front of the class. - Look at the board.

- Call on some Ss to practice in front of 152 the class. - Presen the following table (B2- P.139):

 UNIT 14: MAKING PLANs Composed date: Teaching date: Class: 6A1 Class: 6A2 Class: 6A3 Class: 6A4

Period: 83 LESSON 1: A. VACATION DESTIONATIONS. (A1, A2, A3) I. Aims: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know: - Ask and answer about their vacations. 2. Language skill: - Practice listening skill. - Working in pairs, groups. 3. Attitude: - Help Ss to develop their activeness in communication when using a foreign language, especially in English. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher: - Text book, pictures, cassette... 2. Students: - Textbook, notebook. III. Procedure: Teachers activities 1. Warm up: (5 minutes) Make sentences using the cued words: a- She/ usually play badminton/ fall. b- They/ often go swimming/ summer. c- He/ sometimes go sailing/ spring. d- I/ usually play soccer/ summer. 153 Students activities

Answer key: a) She usually plays badminton in the fall. b) They often go swimming in the summer. c) He sometimes goes sailing in

- Introduce new lesson: In this lesson, we are going to learn about our vacations. 2. Presentation: Introduction (15 minutes) - Presents new words: the summer vacation the citadel (to) stay with (someone) (to) stay for (a day/ a week) uncle (n) aunt (n) (to) visit - Read new words first as model then ask Ss to repeat. - Present the dialogue A1- P. 140. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs. * Comprehension Questions (A2- P.141) - Ask some questions in the text, students can answer in the short answers a) d) + + + + + + +

the spring. d) I usually play soccer in the summer. - Listen to T.

- Listen and write the new words in their notebooks.

- Listen and repeat - Listen to T. - Read the dialogue in pairs. - Listen then answer: Answer key: a) visit Hue b) visit her aunt and uncle c) one week d) visit the citadel - Listen and write the model sentences in their notebooks.

- Present model sentences: What are you going to do? is she Im Shes going to visit Hue. stay for a week.

Practice (10 minutes) - Give some cued words: visit Hue visit BachMa Park visit the citadel camp in the mountains stay in a hotel stay in a tent - Ask Ss to practice in pairs asking and answering about their vacation destinations: - Look at the board.

- Call some pairs to practice in front of the class. 154

- Practice in pairs: Example Exchange: S1: What are you going to do this summer vacation? S2: Im going to visit [Hue]. - Practice in front of the class.

Further Practice (10 minutes) - Make similar conversation. - Ask Ss to make a similar dialogue to the one in A3. - Call some Ss to report the dialogue in front of the class. 3. Consolidation: ( minutes) - Listen and remember. - Repeat the content of the lesson. 4. Homework: ( minutes) - Write assignments. - Write the answers A2 in the book - Do exercises: 1,2- P. 114 (in workbook) Composed date: Teaching date: Class: 6A1 Class: 6A2 Class: 6A3 Class: 6A4 - Report in front of the class.

Period: 84 LESSON 2: A. VACATION DESTIONATIONS. (A4, A5) I. Aims: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know: - Ask and answer about their vacations and others vacations. a) Vocabulary: b) Structure: 2. skills: - Practice listening and reading skill. - Working in pairs, groups. 3. Attitude: - Help Ss to develop their activeness in communication when using a foreign language, especially in English. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher: 155

- Text book, pictures, cassette... 2. Students: - Textbook, notebook. III. Procedure: Teachers activities 1. Warm up: (5 minutes) Complete the following dialogue: A: What _____ this summer vacation? B: Im going to take a trip to Hue. A: How long _____ stay there? B: I ____ for seven days. A: Where ____ stay? B: I ____ in a hotel. A: What ____ to do there? B: I ____ visit some pagodas and mausoleums. - In this lesson, we continue the topic in the last lesson: vacation and plans. 2. New Lesson: Pre- Reading (15 minutes) - Present new words by matching: Ben Thanh Market Nha Trang The beach Ho Chi Minh City The Citadel Ha Noi Ngoc Son Temple Quang Ninh Ha Long Bay Hue - Play a guessing game. - Listen and match. Students activities

Answer key ...are you going to do ... are you going to.... ...am going to stay... ... are you going to... ...am going to stay... ... are you going... ...am going to... - Listen to T.

- Present the content of the passage: Phuong and Mai are going to visit the five places youve matched in their summer vacation. Where are they going to visit first? Second? Third? Fourth? Fifth? Discuss the order you think. While-reading (10 minutes) - Read the text A4- P.142. - Correct Students guessing (Grids - A5 P.143) Place Where How

- Play a game telling about their plans Example: Im going to visit Ha Long Bay. - Listen and dicuss the order: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

- Listen and check their guessing - Copy the table in their notebooks. What 156

First Then

to visit Ha Long bay Ha Noi

to stay

long?

to do?

Next Hue After Nha that trang Finally HCMC - Ask Ss to practice asking and answering about what Phuong and Mai are going to do, using the table above.

- Call some Ss to practice in front of the class. Post- Reading (10 minutes) - Practice asking and answering about themselves using examples in A5- P.143.

- Practice in pairs: Example Exchange: (5- P.143) S1: Which place are Phuong and Mai going to visit first? S2: They are going to visit Ha Long Bay first. S1: Where are they going to stay? S2: They are going to stay with their uncle and aunt, - Practice in front of the class.

- Practice in pairs: Example: S1: Which place are you going to visit? Where are you going to stay? How long are you going to stay? - Practice in front of the class.

- Call some pairs to practice in front of the class. 3. Consolidation: (3 minutes) - Repeat the content of the lesson. 4. Homework: (2 minutes) - Change the subject Phuong and Mai to We to write your summer vacation plan. Composed date: 157 Teaching date: Class: - Write assignments. - Listen and remember.

6A1 Class: 6A2 Class: 6A3 Class: 6A4 Period: 85 LESSON 3: B. FREE TIME PLANS. (B1, B2, B3, B4) I. Aims: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know: - Ask and answer about others future plans. - Write about their plan. 2. Language skill: - Practice listening skill. - Working in pairs, groups. 3. Attitude: - Help Ss to develop their activeness in communication when using a foreign language, especially in English. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher: - Text book, pictures, cassette... 2. Students: - Textbook, notebook. III. Procedure: Teachers activities 1. Warm up: (5 minutes) - Introduce new lesson by making questions concern to the content of the lesson. What are you going to do after school? Where are you going this summer? What are you going to do this evening? 2. New lesson: Pre- listening (10 minutes) - Introduce the topic Free time plans by questioning. 158 Students activities

- Answer Ts questions: I am going to play soccer. I am going to visit my hometown. I am going to wactch T.V

- Listen and answer.

Ex: What do you often do in your free time? What are you going to do tonight? - Explain the use of the phrase: What about you? - Introduce the content of the listening in B1P. 144. - True/ False statements 1. Lan is going to watch T.V tonight. 2. Lan is going to the movie tomorrow. 3. Tuan is not going to play badminton tomorrow. 4. He is going to play football. While- listening (15 minutes) - Play the tape and ask Ss to repeat then do the exercise above. - Call some Ss to present their answerkeys. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about Lan and Tuans plan.

- Listen and copy down. - Listen to T. - Read the text then do exercise.

- Ask Ss to retell Tuan and Lans plan.

- Explain the requirement of the exercise in B2- P. 144. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering using words in a) and b). - Call some pairs practice in front of the class.

- Listen and repeat after the tape. - Present in front of the class. 1- F, 2- T, 3- F, 4- F - Work in pairs. Ex: S1: What is Lan going to do tonight? S2: She is going to do her homework. S1: What is she going to do tomorrow? S2:... - Retell in front of the class. Ex: Lan is going to do her homework tonight and tomorrow she will have a day off, she is going to visit her friends and see a movie. - Listen to T. - Work in pairs. - Present in front of the class. S1: What are you going to do tonight? S2: I am going to see a movie. S1: What are you going to do tomorrow? S2: I am going to go walking in the park.

159

Post- listening (10 minutes) - Explain some new words: + jurassic park + to know - Read the new words fisrt as model then ask Ss to read in chorus. - Ask Ss to listen then answer the following questions (With answer keys): 1. Is Ba going to play football on the weekend? (No, he is not) 2. Is he going to see a movie? (Yes, he is) 3. Which theater is he going to? (Sao Mai theater) 4. Which film is he going to see? (Jurassic Park) 3. Consolidation: (3 minutes) - Repeat the content of the lesson. 4. Home work: (2 minutes) - Write a short passage about their vacation on the weekend by answering the question in B4- P.145. Composed date: Teaching date: Class: 6A1 Class: 6A2 Class: 6A3 Class: 6A4 - Write assignment. - Listen and remember. - Listen and copy down. - Listen and read in chorus. - Listen then find information for the questions.

Period: 86 LESSON 4: B. FREE TIME PLANS. (B5, B6) I. Aims: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know: - Ask and answer about others future plans. - Write about their plan. 2. Language skill: 160

- Practice listening skill. - Working in pairs, groups. 3. Attitude: - Help Ss to develop their activeness in communication when using a foreign language, especially in English. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher: - Text book, pictures, cassette... 2. Students: - Textbook, notebook. III. Procedure: Teachers activities Students activities 1- Warm up: (5 minutes) - Networks: - Do as Ts directions.

Free time plan

2- New lesson: Pre- reading: (10 minutes) - Explain the requirement of the exercise in B4- - Listen to T. P. 145. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering - Work in pairs. about others plan. - Call some pairs to practice in front of the - Present in front of the class. class. S1: What are you going to do on the weekend? S2: On Saturday morning, I am going to see a movie... While- reading: (15 minutes) - Introduce the content of the reading: Minh, Nam and Tuan are going to have a picnic. They have to bring many things such as camera, food, drink... - Ask Ss to play guessing games with the questions: Who is going to take camera, food, drinks...? - Play the tape (B5- P.145) and ask Ss to check their guessing. - Call some Ss to practice reading the passage. 161 - Listen to T.

- Read the text and do as Ts directions. - Listen to the passage and check. - Read aloud in front of the class.

- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about what they are going to bring.

- Work in pairs. Ex: S1: What are Minh, Nam and Tuan going to do? S2: They are going to have a picnic. S1: Who is going to take camera? ... - Practice in front of the class. - Listen and remember. - Look at the pictures and speak out the names: Ex: a- a ball, b- a camera, c- food and fruit, d- drinks, e- a tent - Listen and do exercise. - Present in front of the class. - Listen and copy down.

- Call on some pairs practice aloud in front of the class. Post- reading: (10 minutes) - Explain the requirement of the exercise in B6P. 145. - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in B6 and speak out their names.

- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and doing matching exercise. - Ask Ss to present their answers in front of the class. - Comment and give answer keys. Vui: c, e Mai: d Ly: b Nga: d Lan: a 3- Consolidation: (3 minutes) - Repeat the content of the lesson. 4- Home work: (2 minutes) - Write a short passage about Ss plan next week. Composed date:

- Listen and remember. - Write assignment.

Teaching date:

Class: 6A1 Class: 6A2 Class: 6A3 Class: 6A4

Period: 87 LESSON 5: C. SUGGESTIONS. (C1,C2, C3) 162

I. Aims: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - Give out suggestions when necessary. - Write about their plan. 2. Language skill: - Practice listening and reading skill. - Working in pairs, groups. 3. Attitude: - Help Ss to develop their activeness in communication when using a foreign language, especially in English. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher: - Text book, pictures, cassette... 2. Students: - Textbook, notebook. III. Procedure: Teachers activities 1. Warm up: (5 minutes) - Questioning: Where do people of ten go on vacation? Students activities

- In this lesson we are going to learn how to make suggestions and give suggestions about vacatios. 2. New lesson: Pre- reading (15 minutes) - Introduce some difficult words: + minibus + suggestion + idea - Read first as model then ask Ss to repeat in chorus. - Introduce structures of making suggestions: + Lets go... + Why dont you... 163

- Answer Ts questions: Ex: S1: They often go to HaLong Bay. S2: They go to the beach. ... - Listen to T.

- Listen and copy.

- Read the words and repeat again in chorus. - Listen and copy down.

+ What about... - Give out some situations and ask Ss to make suggestions. + Dung cant do this exercise.

- Ask Ss to read the questions in C2- P. 148 and find out the answer while reading the dialogue. While- reading (10 minutes) - Play the tape (C1- P.148). - Call some Ss to practice reading the dialogue. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions in C2. - Call on some pairs practice aloud in front of the class. - Comment and give out the correct answers.

- Listen to the situations and give suggestions. Ex: S1: Lets help her. S2: Why dont we help her? S3: What about helping her? - Read the questions in order to know more clearly about them.

- Listen to the tape. - Practice reading in front of the class - Answer the questions in pairs: - Practice aloud in front of the class. - Listen and copy down. a) Nam wants to visit Hue. b) Nga wants to go to Huong Pagoda. c) Lan wants to walk there. d) Because its too far. e) He wants to travel by bike. f) Because its too hot. g) Ba wants to travel by minibus.

Post- reading (10 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in C3- P. 148 and answer the questions: a) Where are the children playing? b) Where are these boys standing? c) What are they doing? d) Where are they visiting? e) Which sport are the two boys playing? f) What are the children doing? - Ask Ss to use structures to make suggestions in pairs. - Call on some pairs practice in front of the class. 164 - Look at the pictures and answer. a) They are playing at the beach b) They are standing in the museum. c) They are playing volleyball. d) They are visiting the zoo. e) They are playing badminton. f) They are camping. - Practice in pairs. Ex: S1: Lets go to the beach. S2: Yes, lets. - Practice in front of the class.

3. Consolidation: (3 minutes) - Repeat the content of the lesson. 4. Home work: (2 minutes) - Make a dialogue about their plan in Tet holiday. - Write assignment. WEEK : 06& 07 Date of preparing: Period 75: A. Aim of the lesson How often ..." questions and answer "once/ twice/ three times / a week" to talk about frequency of activities B, Proceduce Teaching aids: posters, pictures. Teacher's tasks Student's tasks I Revision: *Matching:B4p128: *Key: Tan:f, Minh and Ss listen to the tape and check their Nam:e,Lien:a,Lan and Mai:b guessing: 1. Presentation: Write down the key. *Pre teach: Ss listen and guess the words from T's How often ...? (Vietnamese) eliciting. once: (situation) Ss repeat in chorus individually,retell and twice: (situation) copy the words three times: (translation) a week: (translation) Play the game in two teams to check the Checks R.O.R words. *Matching: Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Once a week Twice a week three times a X x ss match in groups Ss write down the model sentences. ng How often + do/does + S + V? 165 week Feed back. *Presentation: B5 p128: How often does she jog? listen to music? X X x x 29 / 2 /2012 - Date of teaching: 1 / 3 / 2012. Unit 12: Lesson 3: B.4 5. - Listen and remember.

She jogs a week listens to music twice reads three times ? Translation in to Vietnamese ? When do you use it? 2, Practice: *Substitution drill: Cues: three, one, four, two, one, five, two, six, one, three, seven, one Ex: T says: three and has Ss say:three times a week. ......etc.... *Pictures drill: B5 p129: How often does Ly go to school? She goes to school (six times) a week. 3. Production: *Find S.O who...... Find S.O who Name ..plays badminton once a week Hoa ..goes to the park twice a week ... Feed back. *. Homework: Ex: 4+5(p105) workbook.

read? once

..... once/ twice/three times a week. Ss answer the T's questions.

do the tasks answer the T's questions by using the cues in the picture.

Ss play the game in teams to fill in the table.

Seen: /2/3/2009

Week 26 Period 76:: Reading activities. Teaching aids: picture, poster. B, Procedure Teacher's tasks I.. Revision: * Noughts and crosses: Give the poster on the board: a Unit 12: Lesson 4: picture story to C.How often? (1-4) the details and practice Adverbs of A. Aims of the lesson understand frequency( always, usually, sometimes, never) with the simple present tense for regular

Student's tasks play the game in two teams. 166

Swim play tennis 1 3 go to shool home work 4 6

read book 2 play football 5 do

watch TV listen to music Play volleyball Ss listen and guess the words from 7 8 9 T's eliciting. S1:How often do you swim? repeat in chorus and then S2. (twice) a week. individually. Feed back. retell and rewrite,copy the words II, New lesson Ss play the game what and 1. Pre- reading: where always: (adv) (situation) (VVVV) usually: (adv) (situation) ( VVV) often: (adv) (situation) (VV) sometimes: (adv) (situation) (V) Ss read the text and guess the never: (adv) (situation) (X) words from the context. Checks what and where 2, While- reading: C2 Ss write down the words. *guessing the meaning: ? Read the text and guess the words in English.Key: 1. Th diu: fly your kite 2. Con diu: kite 3. i cm tri : go camping 4. i d ngoi: have a picnic. Ss pay attention. Feed back. *Grid:Ask Ss to look at the poster do the task in groups Sets the scene and give the model: ? How often do they go to the zoo? They sometimes go to the zoo. How often never sometimes often usually always do they ... ...go to the zoo? ....go to the park? ....have pinic? ....do sports? ....fly kites? ....go camping? ....walk to school? ....do home work? *Answer given: 167

a. about 3 times a week b. twice a week c. No, never d. Yes, always. ? Match the questions with the answers. Feed back. 3, Post reading: ? Ask and answer about you Ex: How often do you go to the zoo? I never go to the zoo. Ask Ss to do ex C4 on p131. *. Home work: Do ex 1+2 p106 workbook.

How often do they go to the zoo? How often do they go to the park? Do they go camping? Do they walk to school? match in 2 groups Ss ask and answer,Ss work in pairs.

Period 77:: Lesson 5: A. Aim of the lesson: C.5 6.

Unit 12:

Reading the text to understand the details and get further practice in simple present tense,adverbs of frequency and outdoor pastimes vocabulary. B, Procedure Teachers activities Students activities. I,. Revision: C5p132: Ask Ss to predict how often Ss predict how often Nga and Lan do Nga and Lan do the things then listen the things then listen and correct their and correct their predictions. predictions. Key: a,never b,sometimes c,often Ss write down the key. d,often e,usually II, New lesson 1, Pre- reading: *Networks: Go walking Write down the free time-activities in the country. Pastimes in the country Have Ss write down the pastimes in the country. *Pre teach: (to)wear: mang ( mime) Clothes: o qun ( example) Boots: ngi nh dy( translation) A stove: bp l ( picture) Ss listen and guess the words from T's eliciting. repeat in chorus and then individually. retell and rewrite,copy the words Ss play the game Rub out and remember.

168

Overnight: (adv) qua m (translation) ) Check the words by Rub out and remember. 2, While reading: C6 p132: Ask Ss to read the text about what Minh and his friends do in their free time. *Questions: 1.What does Minh like doing? 2.What do they always wear? 3.When does he go? 4.Who does he usually go with? 5.Where does he often go? 6.What do they take? Have Ss ask and answer in pairs. 3.Post reading: *Transformation writing: Ask Ss to change Minh to I to rewrite the text. *.Homework: Do ex 3+4 p107 workbook.

Ss read the text about what Minh and his friends do in their free time. Ss answer the questions: 1.He likes walking. 2.They often wear warm clothes and strong boots. 3.He goes on the weekend. 4.He usually goes with two friends. 5.He often goes in the mountain. 6.They take a stove,some water and food. Ss change Minh to I to rewrite the text.

Unit 13: Period 78: Lesson 1:

Activities and the seasons. A The weather and seasons(1) with "what 's the weather like?' to talk about the

A. Aim of the lesson Temperature and seasons vocabulary weather in each season. Teaching aids : pictures, posters B. Procedure Teacher's tasks I.Revision: Call ss to do exercises on the board. Feed back. II. New lesson 1, Presentation: *Pre - teach: the Spring: Ma xun(explanation) the Summer: ma h(exp/ pr) the Fall: ma thu (exp/ pr) the Winter: ma ng( exp/ pr) The season: ma ( example) warm: m p ( example/picture) cool: mt m ( example/picture) checks: R.O.R *Model sentences:

Student's tasks do the tasks

listen and guess the words from T's eliciting repeat in chorus and then individually retell and rewrite. copy the words

169

Use the pictures in A1 Sets the scene What 's the weather like in the Summer? It's hot. What's the weather like in + (season) ? It's + adj(weather). Use: Hi v tr li thi tit theo ma 2, Practice: *Pictures drill: ?Ask Ss to look at the pictures. Ask ss to practise. 3, Production: *Subtitution boxes: Has the poster with the words given: rice, hot, and, mountains, green river, the , yellow, is, beautiful, cold, evening, cool, trees,blue, weather,gray, hot, flowers, afternoon, house, Fall, very. +Ask Ss to write the sentences using the words given in the poster. Feed back. *Home work: Ex 1- 2p108.

listen and answer the T's questions.

Ss retell and rewrite. Ss write down. Ss practise in pairs to ask and answer the questions about the weather.

work in 4 groups.Ex: In the spring: the weather in the afternoon is warm but in the evening it is cool. The rice is green.The trees are beautiful...etc....

Seen:9/3/2009

. Period 79:

***************@*@*@************** Week 27: Unit 13: Lesson 2: A 2 3.

A. Aim of the lesson "What weather do you like? " to talk about favorite weather contract with "What 's the weather like?" Teaching aids: Pictures B. Preocedure Teacher's tasks Student's tasks I. Revision: Calls ss to write down the seasons write more words.(Ss work in 2 and the weather groups) Feed back. II. New lesson 170

1. Presentation: A3 *Pre teach: Uses the pictures. Elicits * Model sentences: +What the weather do you like? -I like hot weather. ?in vietnamese ?when do you use it? ?How do you use it? Contracts "with what's the weather like?" 2. Practice: *Pictures drill: Gives the pictures.Ex: +What weather do you like? -I like cold weather ?Ask Ss to practise. 3. Further practice: *Mapped dialogue: Elicits the mapped dialogue Asks ss to practice Lan Nam ...Ha Noi? ...cold ...Can Tho? ....hot.... ...like? ...cold... ...Ha Noi? ...like? ...hot. ...Can Tho 1. Homework: Ex 3(P.109).

season the spring summer

weather hot cold

pay attention answer the T's questions. What waether + does / do + S + V? S + like/ likes + adj-(weather) Reading through the pictures repeat in chorus and then individually Ss work in pairs

Ss make the same dialogue: +What's the weather like in Ha Noi? -It's cold.What 's the weather like in Can Tho? +It's hot. - What weather do you like? +I like cold weather. -Come to Hanoi. + What weather do you like? - I like hot weather. +Come to Can Tho!

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~@@@~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Period 80: A. Aim of the lesson "When" clause in posive statements with "wh" questions. Teaching aids: flash cards B. Procedure: Teacher's tasks I. Revision: II. New lesson *Networks 171 Student's tasks Unit 13: Lesson 3: A4 - 5

?Tell me some activities for pastimes Feed back: watch T.V Ss do the task in groups. pasttime go swimming books read the Ss guess what Ba does when its hot/cold/ cool/warm. II. New lesson 1. Presentation: The text Sets the scene: *Predict: ?what does Ba do when it's Ss read the text and check their a. hot: predictions. b. cold Ss write down the Model c. cool sentences. d. warm *Reading: ?read the text and check your guess What + do/does +S + do when Feed back - evaluation it's ... (adj of weather) *Model sentences: When it's ...(adj of weather), S + Elicits from the text V(e/s). What do you do when it's hot? Ss practise in pairs. does he ? I go swimming He goes 2, Practice: *Word cue drill SS change the text about Ba and cold/go jogging write about themselves. cool/do aerobics hot/ go swimming warm/ go to the park. 3. Further Practice: *Transformation writing: A4 p 136: When it's hot, I... cold,I... 4. Homework: Ex:4 (p110) workbook. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~@@@ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

172

Period 81: A. Aim of the lesson

Unit 13: Lesson 4: B.Activities in seasons.

Further practice in adverbs of frequency, Simple present, sports Vocabulary seasons Teaching aids: Postes B. Procedure Teacher's tasks Student's tasks I. Revision: *Matching: Ss go to the board and match. ( Ss always VV work individually). usually VVVV often VVV sometimes X never V Ask Ss to go to the board and match. Feed back. II. New lesson 1. Presentation; Ss listen and guess the words from *Pre teach: T's eliciting. (to) play basketball: (mine) repeat in chorus and individually. (to) go sailing: (picture) retell and rewrite *Presentation: The text in B1: Ask Ss to read the text. 2. Practice: Answer key: *Answer given: What do you do in your free time? a. We often play volleyball. What do they do in their free time? b. They sometimes go sailing. What do you do in your free time? c. I often go swimming. What does she do in her freetime? d. She usually plays badminton. What do you do in your free time? e. We always play basketball. Have Ss put the questions to the answers. *Word cue drill: S1: What do you do in the spring? ?Use word cue from the answer given S2: We play volly ball to practice in pairs Ss work in pairs. 3. Production: SS play the game in two teams. Asks ss to play Lucky numbers: Ss play the game in two teams. 1.What is the weather like in the winter? 2.LN! 3.What do you usually do in the winter? 4.What weather do you like? 5.LN! 173

6.What do you often do in the spring? 7.What is the weather like in the summer? Feed back. 4 Home work: Ex 1(p110).workbook. Seen:16/2/2003

~~~~~~~~~~~~~@@@@~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Week 28: Period 82: Unit 13: Lesson 5 : B 2.

A. Aim of the lesson Writing about activities you do in different seasons. Teaching aids: Posters. B, Proceduce Teacher's tasks Student's tasks I,. Revision: Calls ss to do exercise on p110 in Ss go to the board and do exercise the workbook. 1. Feed back. II, New lesson 1, Pre writing: *Brainstorm: ?tell me some activities you usually ss go to the Board and write down. or sometimes do in the summer Work in 2 groups. (winter) Listen to music Sometimes/ inwinter play in the park sometimes/ in summer

usually /in winter Feed back. *Board drill:

usually/ in summer

Ss practise. 174

Models one: +What do you do in the Winter? -I usually play football. -I sometimes watch T.V. *Survey: Hangs the posters name season weather s Hoai Fall cool

Ss work in pairs.

usually go the mounta in

usually do go camping

usually eat/drink cake and hot drink

Ask Ss to work in groups of 6 ss: Ex:+Which season do you like? Ss pay attention and then do the -Fall tasks in groups of 6 ss +What's the weather do you like in the fall? -It's cool +Where do you usually go? Ss complete the table. -to the mountains. +What do you usually do there? -I go camping with my friends +What do you usually eat or drink? -We drink hot drink. .etc. Feed back. 2. While writing: Ss write down. *Write it up: ?Write about your friends you have interviewed, using 3 nd person singular verbs. *Example: Hoai likes the fall when the weather is cool. She usually goes camping with her friends in the mountains.etc. Feed back. Compare their writings. 3. Production: Correct some mistakes. ?Compare with your friends ?correct some mistakes if your fiends made. Correct some mistakes in the front of the class. *. Homework: Ex 2+3(p112) workbook. --------------------------------------Period 83: Unit 14: Making plans. 175

A.Vacation destinations: Lesson 1 : A1,2,3. A. Aim of the lesson "going to" future: positive statements Teaching aids: pictures, poster, cards B, procedure Teacher's tasks 1. Revision: * Slap the board go camping, go to the zoo, play badminton, go to the park, walk in the mountain. Feed back. II, New lesson 1. Presentation: *Pre teach: The summer vacation: (translation) the citadel: (picture) To stay with: (translation) Stay for: ( a week, a day.. Translation) uncle: (a brother of your father) aunt: (a sister of your mother, father) visit: (v) (situation) checks R.O.R * Presentation text: A1: Sets the scene.Ask Ss to read the dialogue. Elicits to give the modelsentences. * Model sentences: What are you going to do? I'm going to visit Hue. Form: What + is/are/am + s+ doing? S + is/are/am + Ving Use:Dng din t hnh ng xy ra vo thi im ni Notes : I am going = I'm going she is going = she's going we are going = we' re going 2. Practice: * wordcue drill: a.Visit Hue b.visit citadel c,stay in a hotel d.stay for a week e.go to market. and "wh" questions to talk about vacation plans Student's tasks SS play the game. work in 2 groups.

Ss listen and guess the words from T's eliciting. repeat in chorus and individually. retell and rewrite copy the words.

pay attention Ss read the dialogue in chorus.

Ss practise. Ex:b, + What are you going to do? -Im going to visit the citadel.

Ss do the task in groups using the Yes/No questions to ask and answer. 176

Ask Ss to practise in pairs. 3. Further practice: * Find s.o who: This summer vacation, are you goingto (stay at home)? Yes, I am/ No, I am not Find s.o who is Name going to... stay at home visit aunt or uncle visit new city stay in a hotel camp in the mountains stay in a tent *. Home work: Ex: 1,2,3 (p114)workbook. ~~~~~~~~~~~@@@~~~~~~~~~~~

Period 84:

Unit 14:

Lesson 2: A4-5 A, Aim of the lesson Ss will be able to read a text about vacation plans to understand the details and practice going to future and sequencing words:first,then,next,after that,finally. B.Proceduce: Teachers activities Students activities I,.Warm up: Revision:(check some newwords). Ss go to the board and write down the II,.New lesson: words. 1,.Pre reading: Pre-teach: The beach. Ss listen and guess the wordsmeaning Temple. form the teachers eliciting. *Guessing game: Ask Ss to guess the full Listen and repeat,then write down. sentence: Im going to visit Ha Long -Ss play the game. Bay. *Matching: -Ss match the places with the cities. Ben Thanh market Nha Trang The beach. Ha Noi 177

The citadel. HCM city Ngoc Son Temple. Hue Ha Long Bay Quang Ninh *Ordering: Phuong and Mai are going to visit the five places above in their vacation.Guess the order of the places they visit: 1.,2., 3, 4..,5. 2,While- reading: *A4:p142: Ask Ss to read the text about Phuong and Mais summer vacation and check their guessing. Have Ss fill in the table with the information from the text: Places Wher How What to e to long to do visit stay First Then Next Afterth at Finally Ask Ss to practise A5 p143. 3.Post- reading: Ask Ss to use the grid heading but their own plans to talk about for their summer vacation: Which places are you going to visit? Where are you going to stay? How long are you going to stay for? What are you going to do there? *Transformation writing: Ask Ss to rewrite the text on p142,changing Phuong and Mai to I and replacing their vacation plans with the students own plans. *Homework: Ex:3 on p.114 workbook.

Ss guess the order of the places Phuong and Mai visit.

Ss read the text about Phuong and Mais summer vacation and check their guessing.

-Ss write down the information they read from the text.

-Ss do ex A5 Ss answer the questions about their vacation plans.

-ss write down.

Seen:

~~~~~~~~~~~~@@@~~~~~~~~~~~~ Week 29: Unit 14: Period 85: Lesson 3: B.1 4. 178

A.Aim of the lesson Ss will be able to further practice in going to to talk B.Proceduce: Teachers activities I,.Warm up: Revision: *Finding friends: homew frien A badmint mo walkin ork d movi on m g e se e pla y do visi t hel p go Ex: Ss go to the board and match the words in the column with the verbs :(See a movie..etc.). *Board drill:Ask Ss to use grid Finding friends: +What are you going to do tomorrow? -Im going to do my homework. 2.Practice: *Predict the dialogue: +What are you going to do tonight? -Im going to(1) +What are you going to do tomorrow? -Its Sunday. Im going to(2)Then were going to(3) .What about you? +Tonight,Im going to(4).. .Tomorrow,Im going to(5).. *B1:Get Ss to read the dialogue in B1 p144 to check their predictions. Give feedback. *Mapped dialogue: .tonight? .help my mom .tomorrow? see a movie. .tonight? go walking. tomorrow?

about plans for the near future. Students activities Ss go to the board and match the words in the column with the verbs: See a movie. Play badminton. Do homework. Visit friend. Help mom. Go walking. Ss use grid Finding friendsand the question What are you going to do tomorrow? to ask their friends about plans. -Ss predict the missing words.

Ss read the dialogue in B1 and check their predictions. -Ss make up a dialogue using the keywords in B2 p144. -Ss practise tha dialogue in roles.

Ss practise in pairs and use the sentence stubs in B4 p145:- then play Chaingame.

play volleyball. *Chain game: Have Ss practise in pairs and use the sentence stubs in B4 p145:- then play Chaingame: *Homework: Ex 1(p115). 179

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~@@@~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Unit 14: Period 86: Lesson 4: B 5 6.

A, Aim of the lesson Ss will be able to further listen and reading practice with Going to. B.Proceduce:

180

Teachers activities I,.Warm up: Revision: *Survey: tonigh on on In the t? Saturda Sunda summ y? y? er? Hoa Lan Ask Ss to use the question What are you going to do.? to ask and answer then fill in the grid. II,.New lesson: 1,.Pre- reading: Preteach: to) bring: mang (example) A camera: my nh ( realia) (to) take a photo: chp nh : (mime) *Pre questions: 1,Where are they going to go? 2,What three things are they going to bring? 3,What are they going to do there? 2,While- reading: B5 p 145: Get Ss to read the text and check their predicted answers. Give feedback. 3,Pre -listening: *Brainstorm: Warm clothes Things to bring for a camping vacation

Students activities Ss use the question What are you going to do.? to ask and answer then fill in the grid.

Ss listen and guess the words from Ts eliciting. Listen and repeat. Write down the words. Ss think of the answers.

_Ss read the text and check their predicted answers.

Ss write things they need to go camping. Ex: a tent.etc

food

Ss predict what 5 people are going to bring when they go camping.

tent +Ask Ss to write things they need to go camping. *Predict: Ask Ss to predict what 5 people are going to bring and match: -Ss listen and check. Vui a ball *Key: Ly a camera Vui a ball Lan some food. Ly a camera Mai some drinks. Lan some food. Nga a tent. Mai some drinks. 4,While- reading: B6 p145: Nga a tent. Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check their predictions. Give feedback. 5,Post reading- and listening: 181 play the game in two teams. Ss Lucky numbers: Ask Ss to use the text in B5+6 to play the game.

Unit 14: Period 87: Lesson 5:

C.Suggestions.(1 3)

A, Aim of the lesson Ss will be able to know how to make suggestions with Lets, What about..?, Why dont we?and responding;Further practice in want to. B. Procedure Teachers activities Students activities I,.Warm up: Greeting. Revision: II,.New lesson: 1.Presentation: Preteach: A pagoda.cha ( picture0 By mini bus.: Xe but nh ( draw) Ss listen and guess the words from Ts Too# very.qu ( translation) eliciting. Too far. Qu xa ( translation) Listen and repeat. *presentation dialogue: C1 p147: Write down the words. Ask Ss to read the dialogue C1 and then Ss read the dialogue C1 and then answer answer the questions in C2.p148: the questions in C2.p148: a.What does Nam want to do? a. Nam wants to go to Hue. b. What does Nga want to do? b. Nga wants to go to Huong pagoda. c.How does Lan want to travel? c.How does Lan want to travel? d.Why doesnt Nam want to walk? d. Nam doesnt want to walk because its e.How does he want to travel? too far. f.Why doesnt Nga want to go by bike? eHe wants to travel by bike. g. How does Ba want to travel? f. Nga doesnt want to go by bike because *Model sentences: its too hot. a.Suggestions: g. Ba wants to travel by minibus. +Lets go camping. +What about going camping? -Ss write down the Model sentences: +Why dont we go camping? Suggestions and Responding. b.Responding: +Yes,thats a good idea. +No.I dont want to. 2,Practice: *Picture drill: Ss work in pairs to practise,using C3. Ask Ss to use C3 to practise in pairs. +Example exchanges: =Lets go to the beach. -Yes.Thats a good idea. 3,Production: Make up the dialogue: *Mapped dialogue: +Lets see a movie. -No,Lets go to the beach. +No,I dont want to.Its too hot. .see a movie No.go to the What about going to the museum. 182

beach No.too hot. ..go to the museum No.go by minibus Yes.walk. Yes.

-Yes,lets walk. +No,lets go by minibus. -Yes.That is a good idea.

*Homework: Ex: 1+2+3 p 116 workbook. Seen:

~~~~~~~~~~~~@@@~~~~~~~~~~~~ Week 30 Unit 14: Period 88: Lesson 6: Grammar practice.

A,Aim of the lesson Ss will be able to further practice in Present simple tense,Adverbs of frequency,Present Progressive, Going to future and the weather. II.Proceduce:

Study / not study

183

Teachers activities 1.Warm up: Greet. II,.New lesson: *.Present simple: Survey: Name: sports season food drink 1.Ha v x soccer v x v x v x

Students activities Ss greet. Ss fill in the survey.

Ss work in pairs to fill in the survey.

2. V: like X:dont like Ask Ss to use the example exchanges: +What sports do you like? -I like soccer. + What sports dont you like? -*Write it up: Have Ss use the survey to write it up: Ha likes soccer but she doesnt like. *Adverbs of frequency:: *Slap the board:

often

+What sports do you like? -I like soccer. + What sports dont you like? -.. Ss write down about their friends. Ss play the game in two teams.

alway s

neve r

sometime s

Twice a week Have Ss do ex grammar practice 2 on usually p.150. *Noughts and crosses: TV? Swimming? Tennis? the movies? Your mom? Camping? the store? Fishing? Badminton?

Ss do ex Grammar practice 2.

Ss play the game in two teams.

Ask Ss to play the game in two teams: Ex: +How often do you {go to the movies}? -{Twice a week}. *.Present progressive tense: Get up at 6 / get up at 7 Go to school / go camping

Ss use the question with How often and adverbs of frequency.

Ss practise. 184 do ex Grammar practice 3: Complete Ss the dialogue,using going to to talk about the plan.

Have rice for lunch / have

Date: 9/3/2007 Period 80 Unit13 activities and the seasons Lesson 2: A2-3 (*P. 135) A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk about your favourite weather and contrast it with What is the weather like? I.Knowledges : What weather do you like? What is the weather like? II. Skill: Speaking III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan, . B. Procedures : I. Settlement Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : Asks Ss to make question and the answer from cues : Can tho / hot . III. New lesson: Teachers activities Students activities 1. Revision : Wordsquare _ Asks Ss to find out vocab from wordsquare F A L L 185

Ss work in individually to find out vocab from wordsquare

C O L D X W A R M N S S G N I R P S U E O N L N I O M A T H S I T S M S C O O L K E E O 186

Listen to the tape to correct their precdictions -

Ss listen and then practice in pairs Ss copy down on their notebook Work in pairs to practice following example exchange: S1:What weather do you/ they like? S2 : I / Theylike [hot] weather

Work in pairs to make the dia Example: S1: What is the weather like in Ha noi? S2: Its cold S1: What is the weather like in Can tho? S2: Its hot S1: What weather do you like? S2 : I like cold weather S1: come to Ha noi S2: What weather do you like? S2 : I like hot weather S1: Come to Can tho

W E A T H E R N Answer keys : Spring : go, got, me, sea,on,summer,season : fall,cold,warm,cool,weather 2 Presentation:A3 P 135 -T reads the text ,then asks Ss to practice Model sentences : What weather do you like? I like hot weather What is the weather like today ? Its cold 3. Practice : Picture drill/ Word cue drill A3 P135 -Asks Ss to practice in pairs following example exchange: S1 : What weather do you/ they like? S2 : I /Theylike [hot] weather a.She /like/ hotweather b. I /like /cool c. Huy/like/ warm 4. Further practice : Mapped dialogue: -Asks Ss to make the dia Can tho Ha noi ....Hanoi? ...cold . .. Can tho ? ...hot ...like? ...cold . ...hanoi? ...like? ...hot... ....can tho

IV. Consolidation: Asks Ss to write the model sentences. V. Homework: Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 3 Do ex 2,3 P 108 (work book) 187

Date: 9/3/2007 Period 81 Unit13 activities and the seasons Lesson 3: A4-5 (P. 136)

A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to use when clauses in positive statements and Wh questions I.Knowledges : What questions II. Skill: Speaking III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan, . B. Procedures : I. Settlement Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : Asks Ss to make question and the answer from cues : She/like/ hot . III. New lesson: Teachers activities Students activities 1 Presentation: Networks go for a walk listen to music read a book watch TV fly kites play soccer Pastimes go swimming

Predict -Asks Ss to predict what Ba does when its hot/ cold/ cool/warm Answer keys : a. when its hot He goes camping. b. when its cold he plays soccer c. when its cool he goes jogging d. when its warm he goes fishing Presentation Text : A4 P136 -T reads the text ,then asks Ss to read and check their predictions . Model sentences : what does Ba do when its hot? Do you He goes swimming . I go 3. Practice : Word cue drill -Asks Ss to practice in pairs following example exchange: S1 : When its cold do you jog? 188

Ss work in individually to write vocab - go joging , go fishing , play badmimton - do aerobics, go camping Work in groups to predict what Ba does when its hot/ cold/ cool/warm

Listen to the text, then read to correct their precdictions Copy down the model sentences

Work in pairs to practice following example exchange: S1 : When its cold do you jog?

S2 : Yes, I do / No,I dont a.cold / go jogging ? b. cool/ do aerobics? c. hot / go swimming? d. warm / go to the park? 4. Further practice : Transformation writing: -Asks Ss to change the text about Ba to write about themselves ,using I following example : when its hot I ...... when its cold .I.... when its cool.I..... when its warm I...... - Then Asks Ss to swap their writing on the board , read theirs partners text then write about their partner,using He/She

S2 : Yes, I do / No,I dont

Work in pairs to change the text about Ba to write about themselves ,using I following example : when its hot I ...... when its cold ..... when its cool...... when its warm ...... Then swap their writing on the board , read theirs partners text then write about their partner,using He/She following example : when its hot She ...... when its cold he... when its cool. she..... when its warm he......

IV. Consolidation: Asks Ss to write the model sentences. V. Homework: Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 4 Do ex 4 P. 111 (work book)

Date : 12 /3/2007 Period 82 Unit13

activities and the seasons Lesson 4: B1 (*P. 138-9)

A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice in advs of frequency, Simple present , sports vocabulary,season I, Knowledges: sports, seasons vocabulary advs of frequency II,Skills: Speaking 189

III,Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Check attandence II,Checking. Check the form What do you do whene it's hot? III,New lesson: Teacher's activities -1 Matching : -Asks SS to match x never always often usually sometimes 2 Presentation: *Pre -teach: (to) play basketball: ( to) go sailing: T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check : What and Where play basketball go sailing

Greeting

Students' activities Work in individually to match

Listen and repeat in choral, in groups, in individually Then copy down on their notebooks

Work in groups to play this game

Listen and practice the text Work in individually to make the questions for the answers Then share with their parter in pairs

cold

hot

warm

weather

Presentation : B1 P 138 -Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text 2.Practice: Answer given: Asks Ss to make questions for the answer a. We often play volleyball? 190

b. They sometimes go sailing c. I often go swimming d. She usually plays badminton e. We always play basketball Answer given: a.What do you do in the spring? b. What do they do in the fall? c. What do you do in the summer ? d.What does do in the fall? e.What do you do in the winter? 3 Production : Lucky Numbers -Asks Ss to play the game by answer the questions 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 5 9 8 7 6 1 What is the weather like in winter ? 2 What do you usually do in the winter? 3 What do you usually eat in the winter? 4 LN 5 What is the weather like in the spring ? 6 LN 7 Where do you usually go in the summer ? 8 What weather do you like ? 9 What fruit do you like ? 10 LN 11 What is the weather like in the fall ? 12 What sports do you do in the winter? IV Consolidation: V, Homework: 191

Work in groups to answer the questions Example : 1 It's cold 2

10 Do ex 1,2 P 111-112 11 Prepare Lesson 5 B2

Date 12 /3/2007 Period 83 Unit13

activities and the seasons Lesson 5: B2 (*P. 139)

A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk write activities you do in different season I, Knowledges: temperature and seasons vocabulary What 's the weather like ? II,Skills: Writing III,Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. Check vocab III,New lesson: Teacher's activities Students' activities -1 Pre-Writing: *Brainstorm : Activities and seasons go swimming watch TV Work in groups to write vocab winter go jogging

summer play in the park

hot winter Board drill : B2 P. 139 -Asks Ss to practice the structure S1 : What do you do in the summer ? S2 : I often play tennis Survey : Asks SS to fill in the table by asking and answering follwing example:

Work in pairs to practice the structure S1 : What do you do in the summer ? S2 : I often [ play tennis ]

Name Season Weather usuallygo 192

Work in pairs to ask and answer follwing example

usuallydo usually Hoai fall cool The mountains Go camping A picnic hot drink

Practice the dialogue

... Work in groups to write about the friends following example Hoai likes the fall whene the weather is cool.She usually goes camping S1; Which season do you like ? S2;: Fall S1: What's the weather do you like in the fall S2: It's cool S1: Where do you usually do you go ? S2: to the mountains S1: What do you usually do there ? S2: I go camping with my friends S1: What do you usually eat or drink ? S2 We usually take a picnic and a lot of hot drinks Write it up: - Asks SS to write about the friends following example Hoai likes the fall whene the weather is cool.She usually goes camping IV Consolidation: Check the vocab V, Homework: 12 Do ex 4 - Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 1 A1-3 (P 140-141)

193

Date : 20 /3/2007 Period 84 Unit14

making plans Lesson 1: A1 (*P. 140-141)

A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk vacation plans I, Knowledges: ''going to , positive statements and Wh 'questions II,Skills: Speaking III,Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. Check the form What do you do when it's hot? III,New lesson: Teacher's activities Students' activities -1 Presentation: *Pre -teach: the summer vacation ( translation) : k ngh h the citadel (picture): thnh ni (to) stay with ( someone): vi ai (to) stay for ( aweek/a day): bao nhiu ngy my uncle (example): ch ,bc ti my aunt (example): c, d ti (to ) visit ( translation): thm T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check : Ordering vocabulary A 1 p 140 -T reads the text aloud Answer keys : 1 the summer vacation 4(to) stay for ( aweek/a day 6 the citadel 6 my uncle 3 (to) stay with someone 5 my aunt 2 (to ) visit Presentation dialogue : A1 P 140 -Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text - Then asks some questions Answer keys : Visit Hue , with her aunt and uncle, one a week , visit the citadel Model sentences : What are you going to do ? I'm going to visit Hue 194

Listen and repeat in choral, in groups, in individually Then copy down on their notebooks

Work in individually to listen to the text to order vocab

Listen and practice the text Work in individually answers questions

Copy down the form

She's stay for a week 2.Practice: Work Cue Drill: Asks Ss to make questions follwing example exchange : S1: What are you going do this summer ? S2: I'm going to visit [Hue ] 3 Further practice : Find S.O who -Asks Ss to play the game following example exchange : S1: This summer vacation , are you going to [ stay at home ] ? S2: Yes,I"m / No, I'm not Find someone who is going to Name ,, stay at home

Work in pairs to answer following example exchange : S1: What are you going do this summer ? S2: I'm going to visit [Hue ] Work in groups to play the game following example exchange : S1: This summer vacation , are you going to [ stay at home ] ? S2: Yes,I"m / No, I'm not

... visit an aunt or uncle

... visit a new city

...stay in a hotel

.. camp in the mountais

..stay in a tent 2007 IV Consolidation: V, Homework: 13 Do ex 1,2 P 114 14 Prepare Lesson 2 A4-5

Date: 29/3/ Period 85 Unit 14 : making plans Lesson2 : A4-5 P 142-143 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the details text and practice going to future 195

and sequencing words: first, then, next, after that, finally. I.Knowledges : going to future and sequencing words: first, then, next, after that, finally. II. Skill: Speaking III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan, spare table. B. Procedures : I. Settlement II.Checking : . III. New lesson: Teachers activities Students activities 1. Pre- reading Pre-teach - The beach (example ) - A temple ( picture) T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check : Matching Asks Ss to match the word in the column A with the word in the column B A B Ha long bay Hue Ben thanh market Nha trang The beach HCM city The citadel Quang ninh Ngoc son temple Ha noi Ordering : -T says : Phuong and Mai are going to visit the five places youve matched in the summer vacation 1 2 3 4 5 2. While reading : A4 - P 142 -Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text , -Asks Ss to read the text to check their order the places then asks Ss to fill in the correct order in the column one of the gird below with answer keys 196 Read the text to check their order the places and practice the text Then fill in the correct order in the column one of the gird below in individually Ss listen and order the places

Ss listen and repeat in chorus and then individually Ss copy down on their notebook Work in groups to play this game

Work in individually to change information

Places to visit Where to stay How long What to do First Then Next After that finally Ha long Ha noi Hue Nha trang HCM 4. Post reading : TRansformation writing: -Asks Ss to change information from the text on P.142 change Phuong and Mai to I and replacecing their vacation plan with the students own plans Keys : I ..... IV. Consolidation: Asks Ss to write vocabulary. V. Homework: Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 2 Do ex 3 P 114 (work book)

from the text on P.142 change Phuong and Mai to I and replacecing their vacation plan with the students own plans

Date: 29/3/2007 Period 86 Unit 14 : making plans Lesson3 :B1--4 P 144-145 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further speaking to talk about plans for the near future I.Knowledges : going to future II. Skill: Speaking III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : I. Settlement II.Checking : . III. New lesson: Teachers activities Students activities 1.Review Finding friends :(with answer keys ) Asks Ss to complete the table following example exchange : S1: What are you going to do tomorrow? 197

Work in individually to complete the table

S2: Im going to [do my homework] homework My friend A soocer match A movie badminton My mon walking See Play

following example exchange : S1: What are you going to do tomorrow? S2: Im going to [do my homework

Work in pairs to predict the dialogue

Ss copy down the dialogue and Then fill in the gaps in pairs then practice the dia in pairs

Do

Visit

Work in groups to play this game Example exchange : S1: On Sunday morning Im going to go shopping S2: On Sunday morning Im going to go shopping and on Sunday afternoon Im going watch TV.

Help Go 198

 watch 2 Practice : Predict dialogue : -Asks Ss to predict the dialogue Tuan: What are you going to do tonight? Lan: I;m going to ...................... Tuan : What are you going to do tomorrow ? Lan: Its Sunday .Im going to .................Then were going to .......what about you? Tuan : Tonight , Im going to ....... tomorrow, Im going to............ Mapped dialogue B2 P 144 -Asks Ss to make the dialogue Example exchange : .... tonight ? ...see a movie . . ...... tonight ? ...help my Mom .........tomorrow? ..... go walking . ........tomorrow? ..play volleyball S1: What are you going to do tonight ? S2: I;m going to see a movie .What are you going to do tonight ? S1: I;m going to help my mom .What are you going to ? S2: ect..... 4.Chain game : -Asks Ss to practice in pairs ,using the sentences Example exchange : S1: On Sunday morning Im going to go shopping S2: On Sunday morning Im going to go shopping and on Sunday afternoon Im going watch TV. IV. Consolidation: The form going to . V. Homework: Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 4 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work bo

Date : 5 /4/2007 Period 87 Unit14

making plans 199

Lesson 4 B5-6 (*P. 145-146) A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further listening and reading practice with 'going to ' I Knowledges: ''going to ''. II Skills: reading and listening III Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. Check the form What are you going to do tomorrow? III,New lesson: Teacher's activities Students' activities -1 Review : Survey -Asks Ss to practice the structure What are you going to do .... name tonight On Sunday On Saturday In the summer vacation me 2 Pre -reading *Pre -teach: (to ) bring ( translation): mang (to ) take a photo (mime): chp nh a camera ( picture/ realia): my nh T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check : what and where Bring take a photo a camera Listen and check their prediction ,then practice the text Work in individually To write vocabulary A tent ,a kite , food .... Listen and repeat in choral, in groups, in individually Then copy down on their notebooks Work in groups tp play this game Work in individually to these answer questions

Work in pairs to practice the structure What are you going to do ?

Pre questions -T says : Minh and his friends are going to have a picnic 1 Where are they going to ? 2 What three things are they going to bring ? 3 What are they going to there? 3 While -reading : 200

_T reads the text ,asks Ss to read to check their prediction Answer keys : 1 .near a lake 2 .a camera , food and drink 3. take a photos 4 Pre-listening: Brainstorm Things to bring for a camping vacation -Then asks Ss to predict these things Vui,Ly ,Lan,Mai and Nga bring Vui a ball Ly a camera Lan some food Mai some drink Nga a tent 5 While-listening : B6 P.145 -Asks Ss to listen to the tape to check their prediction Answer keys : Vui: a tent ,some food Ly : a camera Lan : a ball Mai and Nga : some drink : IV Consolidation: V, Homework: 15 Do ex 3,4 P 115 16 Prepare Lesson 5 Then predict these things Vui,Ly ,Lan,Mai and Nga bring

Work in pairs to listen to the tape to check their prediction

Date : 5 /4/2007 Period 88 Unit14

making plans Lesson 5: C1-3 (*P. 147)

A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to make suggestions with Lets.. and respond, further practice in want to (do) ' I Knowledges: 'Lets.. want to (do) ' . II Skills: Speaking III Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence 201

II,Checking. AsksSs to write vocabulary III,New lesson: Teacher's activities 1 Presentation : *Pre -teach: by minibus ( example) : bng xe but nh a pagoda ( picture): cha too ( synonym very ) : rt too far ( example ) : rt xa T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check : ROR by minibus a pagoda too far

Students' activities

Listen and repeat in choral, in groups, in individually Then copy down on their notebooks

Work in groups tp play this game

Pre questions -T says : Ba,Lan and Nam are going to have a picnic 1 Where are they going to go ? 2 How are they going to travel? Presentation dialogue _T reads the dialogue ,asks Ss to check their prediction Answer keys : 1 Huong pagoda 2 by minibus _Asks Ss to answer the questions C2 P .148 in the text book Answer keys : a Nam wants to go to Hue b Nga wants to go to Huong pagoda c Lan wants to walk d Because its too far e By bike f Because its too hot g Ba wants to travel by minibus Model sentences : -17 Lets go camping Walk there -18 Thats a good idea -19 No,I dont want to 2 Practice : Picture drill C3 a-f P.148-149 with work cue Yes/no Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange S1: Lets go to the beach S2: Thats a good idea/ No I dont want to 3 Production : 202

Work in individually to answer these questions by predicting

Listen and check their prediction ,then practice the dialogue Work in pair to answer the questions

Listen and copy down

Work in pairs to practice the structure following example exchange S1: Lets go to the beach S2: Thats a good idea/ No I dont want to

Mapped dialogue You See a movie No...too hot Go to the museun No..go by minibus

Your friend no..go to the beach Yes ...walk Yes

Work in pairs to make the dialogue

IV Consolidation: V, Homework: 20 Do ex 5 P 115 21 Prepare Lesson 6

Date : 5 /4/2007 Period 89 Unit14

making plans Lesson 6: Grammar practice (*P. 150-153)

A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice in Present simple,Adv of frequency,Present progressive ,going to future and the weather I Knowledges: Present simple,Adv of frequency. Present progressive ,going to future and the weather . II Skills: Speaking and writing III Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. AsksSs to write vocabulary III,New lesson: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1 Present simple: Survey: Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange S1: What sports do you like ? S2: Football S1: What sports dont you like ? S2: swimming Like.... Name Sports 203 .....dont like......

Work in pairs to practice the structure following example exchange S1: What sports do you like ? S2: Football S1: What sports dont you like ? S2: swimming

Work in individually to write it

 Season Food Drink Ha Football Swimming

upfollowing example exchange Ha likes football but she doesnt like swimming Work in groups to play this game

Work in groups to play this game following example exchange S!: How often do you [go to the movie ]? S2 : Twice a week Work in pairs to practice the structure following example exchange S1:What are you going to do ? S2 : Im going to [ play football ] Work in pairs to practice the structure following example exchange S1 : Hung usually[ gets up at 6 ] S2: Thats right but today he is ] [getting up at 7] Work in individually toanswer the questions then write a pharagraph

-Asks Ss to write it up following example exchange Ha likes football but she doesnt like swimming 2 Adv of frequency: Asks Ss to play the game STB Lun lun khng bao gi thnh thong

hai ln mt tun thng xuyn mt ln trong nm 3 Grammar practice : Asks Ss to play the game noughts and crosses following example exchange S!: How often do you [go to the movie ]? S2 : Twice a week TV? The movies ? the store? Swimming ? your mom? Fishing? 204

Table tennis? Caping ? badmonton ? 4 Future going to : Picture drill 4 P.151-152 -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange S1! What are you going to do ? S2 : Im going to [ play football 5 Present progressive : -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange S1 : Hung usually[ gets up at 6 ] S2: Thats right but today he is ] [getting up at 7] a. get up at 6/get up at 7 b. go to school/ go camping c. have rice for lunch/ have a picnic 6 future plans and the weather -Asks Ss to answer the questions 1 Where are you going to do ? 2 Who are you going to with ? 3 What season are you going to go in? 4 What s the weather like then? 5 What are you going to bring with you ? Example : Im going to go to Sapa with my friends. We are going to in the spring .Its cool but we like cool weather ... IV Consolidation: Present simple,Adv of frequency. Present progressive ,going to future and the weather V, Homework: 22 Prepare unit 15 Lesson Date : 10 /4/2007 Period 90 45 minute test A. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , T can check Ss understanding and help Ss review the structures theyve learned I . Knowledge: vocab and structures in unit 12-14 II. Skills : writing III. Preparation: test papers B. Contents: I Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences (4ms) 1, How .....do you go to the zoo ? Twice a week. a, often b, long c,old d, many 2, She ............sports . a ,likes b, like c, is liking d, liked 3, They .....playing soccer. a, is b, are c, am d, going 4, Im going to stay.... a week . a, in b, at c, from d, for 5, ....is the weather like in Hue? a, when b, what c, where d, how 6, Lets ........to the cinema . a, go b, going c, goes d, to go 7, How ...............is the cake ? a , long b, much c, many d, often 8, He .......TV at the moment a ,watches b, watch c, watching d, is watching II Put the verb in the correct tense ( 1 m) 1, We...............................(play) volleyball now. 2, This summer vacation, Hoa ....................(be) going to visit Ngoc Son temple. 205

3, How ...........Lan.............(travel) to school? 4, I usually .....................(go ) camping in the summer . III Match the questions in colum A with the answer in the colum B (3ms): A B 1 How often do you go fishing ? a , He watches TV 2, What weather does she like? b , Id like some milk . 3, What does Ba do when its cold ? c, Once a week 4, What does he do in the morning d, She likes cool weather 5, What would you like? e, Two kilos 6, How much rice do you want? f, He plays tennis when its cold IV Read the passage andwrite T(true ) and F (False) (1 m): Nga is a teacher,so she is free in the summer. Shes going on vacation this summer. First, she is going to visit Ha long bay. She is going to stay in a hotel for two days. Then she is going to visit Da lat for three days. Finall she is going to visit some friends in Ho Chi Minh city.They are going to walk along Sai gon river . She is going to travel by coach. 1, She is going to visit Ha long bay first, then Ho Chi Minh city and finally in Da lat. 2, She is going to travel by coach. 3, She is going to visit Da lat for three days. 4, She is going to visit her uncle in Ho Chi Minh city. V Write 5 adv of frequency (1m) ................................. ...................................... 45 minute test Students name : ...................................................... Class : 6 Mark Teachers mark I Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences (4ms) 1, How .....do you go to the zoo ? Twice a week. a, often b, long c,old 2, She ............sports . a ,likes b, like c, is liking 3, They .....playing soccer. a, is b, are c, am 4, Im going to stay.... a week . a, in b, at c, from 5, ....is the weather like in Hue? a, when b, what c, where 6, Lets ........to the cinema . a, go b, going c, goes 7, How ...............is the cake ? a , long b, much c, many 8, He .......TV at the moment a ,watches b, watch c, watching II Put the verb in the correct tense ( 1 m) 1, We...............................(play) volleyball now. 2, This summer vacation, Hoa ....................(be) going to visit Ngoc Son temple. 3, How ........... ........Lan.............(travel) to school? 4, I usually .....................(go ) camping in the summer . III Match the questions in colum A with the answer in the colum B (3ms): A B 1 How often do you go fishing ? a , He watches TV 2, What weather does she like? b , Id like some milk . 3, What does Ba do when its cold ? c, Once a week 4, What does he do in the morning d, She likes cool weather 206

d, many d, liked d, going d, for d, how d, to go d, often d, is watching

5, What would you like? 6, How much rice do you want?

e, Two kilos f, He plays tennis when its cold

IV Read the passage andwrite T(true ) and F (False) (1 m): Nga is a teacher, so she is free in the summer. Shes going on vacation this summer. First, she is going to vis Ha long bay. She is going to stay in a hotel for two days. Then she is going to visit Da lat for three days. Final she is going to visit some friends in Ho Chi Minh city.They are going to walk along Sai gon river . She is goin to travel by coach. 1, She is going to visit Ha long bay first, then Ho Chi Minh city and finally in Da lat. 2, She is going to travel by coach. 3, She is going to visit Da Lat for three days. 4, She is going to visit her uncle in Ho Chi Minh city. V Write 5 adv of frequency (1m) ........................................................................................................................................................... Date: 19/4/2007 Period 92 Unit 15 : countries Lesson 3 :A5 P 156 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to write a post card about being on vacation I.Knowledges : Countries, nationalities and languages vocabulary II. Skill: writing III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : Settlement Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : . III. New lesson: Teachers activities Students activities 1 Revision : Work cue drill: -Asks Ss to pratice the structure following example exchange : S1: Where is Hoa from ? S2: She is from Viet nam S1: What language does she speak ? S2 : She speaks Viet namese . a. Hoa/Viet nam b. Tomiko/ Japan c. Jo/ Australia d. John/ Britain e. Susan/ Canada 2.Pre-writing : Pre-teach: A post card (real): (to )be on vacation (Example ): wet (example) : 207

Work in pairs to pratice the structure following example exchange : S1: Where is Hoa from ? S2: She is from Viet nam S1: What language does she speak ? S2 : She speaks Viet namese .

Ss listen and repeat in chorus and then individually

a lot of (synonym: many): interesting places (example): T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check: What and where be on vacation wet interesting places a lot of -Asks Ss to read the text to answer the questions (with answer keys a. Who is the post card from ? ( Nhan) b. Where is he ? ( in london) c. What is the weather like? (cool and wet d. Is he travelling by train ? ( no,by bus ) e. Whos the postcard to ? ( Minh ) Matching -Asks Ss to put the words into three columns (with answer keys) Country City interesting places Japan Tokyo Mount Fujiama Viet nam Hue The citadel The USA New york The statue of Liberty China Beijing The great wall 2 While-writing : Transformation writing -Asks Ss to write 3 Post wrting : Exhibition -T corrects their mistakes V. Consolidation: Vocabulary V. Homework: Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)

Ss copy down on their notebook Work in groups to play this game

Work in pairs to read the text to answer the questions (with answer keys

Work in individually to put the words into three columns

Work in groups to write Stick their poster on the board to correct each other

Date : 20 /4/2007 Period 93 Unit15

countries Lesson 3: B1 P. 158

A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to compare places ,using the comparative and superrlative adj 208

of one syllable. I Knowledges: comparative and superrlative adj of one syllable. II Skills: Speaking III Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. Asks Ss to write vocabulary III,New lesson: Teacher's activities 1 Revision: Matching -Asks Ss to choose the adjs which best describe the cities (a city can have more than one adj hot Hue wet HCM city cold Hoi an big Sapa small Ha noi long xuyen 2 Presentation : Presentation Text -Reads the text, asks Ss to practice Models : 1: Adj + er : smaller, cloder 2: Adj +est : smallest. clodest Note: Double last letter +er : thinner, bigger 3 Practice: word cue drill -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange S1 : Hanoi is bigger than Da nang S2: But HCM city is the biggest a. Da nang Ha noi HCM city (big) b. Ha noi Uong bi Sapa (clod ) c. Vinh Long xuyen Hoi an (small) d. Ha noi Can tho Hue ( wet) 4 Further practice : Answer given _T gives the answer asks Ss to make questions with answer keys a. Phanxipang Whats the tallest mountain in Viet nam? b.The Mekong Whats the biggest river in Viet nam? c. Hue Whats the wettest city in Viet nam? d. Sapa Whasts the clodest town in Viet nam? e. HCM city Whats the biggest city in Viet nam? -Asks Ss to play Noughts and crosses by comparing their home 209 Students' activities

Work in individually to choose the adjs which best describe the cities (a city can have more than one adj )

Listen and copy down the models

Work in pair to practice the structure following exaple exchange S1 : Hanoi is bigger than Da nang S2: But HCM city is the biggest

Work in pairs to make questions

town with towm in the box Ha noi Hue HCM city Hai phong Da nang Can tho

Sapa Hoi an Da lat Work in groups to play game Example : Ha noi is bigger than Quang tri

IV Consolidation: Check the models V, Homework: 23 Do ex 1,2 P 129 24 Prepare Lesson 4 Date : 20 /4/2007 Period 94 Unit15

countries Lesson 4: B2-5 P. 159-161

A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to read facts about famous places in the world and practice comparatives I Knowledges: comparative . II Skills: Reading and Speaking III Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. Asks Ss to write the sentences from the cue words Ha noi / small/ Hcm city HCM city /biggest city III,New lesson: Teacher's activities 1 Revision: Lucky numbers -Asks Ss to play this game by asking and answering questions 1. Whats the biggest city in Viet nam ? (HCM ) 2. Whats the biggest city in Britain? (Lon don) 3. Whats the biggest city in Japan ? ( Tokyo) 4. LN 5. Whats the tallest mountain you know? 6. LN 7. Whats the wettest you know? 8. Which one s colder : Can tho or Sapa? 210 Students' activities

Work in groups to play this game 1 2 3 4 8

2 Pre-reading : *Pre -teach: high (example) : cao long (mime) : di thick (example): dy over a million (translation) : mt triu -T uses the techniques to elicit each word -T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually -T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress -T asks Ss to copy Check : Wordsquare _Asks Ss to find out the words W E T B I G C T H I C K L O N G E R L V O L D X A E D L O C 211

7 6 5

Listen and repeat in choral, in groups, in individually Then copy down on their notebooks

Work in groups to find out the words

Work in individually to put the cities in order : biggest first

Work in individually to answer the questions in B2 P.159

Work in individuallylook at the text to guess the meaning of 1 a population 2 the capital city 3 a building

T R H I G H Keys : wet, big, thick, long, longer, old, high over,big, do, no cool tall cold Odering: _Asks Ss to put the cities in order : biggest first HCM, LONDON, TOKYO, HANOI, MEXICO. 3While-reading :B2 P.159 -Asks Ss to read the text to check their order Keys : 1-MEXICO, 2-TOKYO,3-LONDON, 4-HCM, 5-HANOI -Asks Ss to answer the questions in B2 P.159 Answer Keys : a.No,it is not b.Its MEXICO c. Tokyo is bigger than London 4 Post -reading : guess from the cotext -Asks Ss to look at the text and pictures to guess the meaning of 1 a population 2 the capital city 3 a building 4 kilometers 5 meters 6 a structure _ IV Consolidation: Check vocabulary V, Homework: 25 Do ex 3 P.129-130 26 Prepare Lesson 5

4 kilometers 5 meters 6 a structure

Date : 20 /4/2007 Period 95 Unit15

countries Lesson 5: C1-2 P. 162-164

A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be describe Viet nam use lots of... as a quantitier I Knowledges: Lots of , Geography vocabulary . II Skills: Speaking and writing III Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures 212

Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. Asks Ss to write vocabulary III,New lesson: Teacher's activities 1 Revision: Slap the board -Asks Ss to play this game by listening and slapping in the words beautiful beaches mountains 2 Presentation : *Pre -teach: a forest (picture): cnh rng a desert ( translation): sa mc (to ) rain ( picture ): ma great (a) (example): v i ,to ln lots of ( synonym: alot of ,many) : nhiu -T uses the techniques to elicit each word -T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually -T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress -T asks Ss to copy Check : R.O.R -Asks Ss to read the text to answer the question What are the 6 natural features Lan tells us about ? Keys : 1 mountains 4 rain 2 rivers 5 forest 3 lakes 6 forest Model sentences : We have lots of mountains, rivers, forests. Rain. 3 Practice : Picture drill C2 P.164 -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange : S1 : Does Viet nam have lots of [ mountains ] ? S2: Yes, it does . T/F repetition drill: -Asks Ss to listen and repeat if the sentences which T reads 213 green rivers fields lakes Students' activities

Work in groups to play this game

Listen and repeat in choral, in groups, in individually Then copy down on their notebooks

Work in groups to play this game Work in individually to read the text to answer the question What are the 6 natural features Lan tells us about ?' Listen and copy down it Work in pairs to practice the structure following example exchange : S1 : Does Viet nam have lots of [ mountains ] ? S2: Yes, it does . Listen and repeat if the

is right and keep silent if it wrong Example : T : There are lots of beaches in Da nang There are lots of forests in Ha noi There are lots of lakes in Ha noi 4 Production : Noughts and Crosses -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange : S1: Are there any[ forests] in Viet nam? S2: Yes/ No, there are. Mountains Beaches Trees rivers rain interesting places forests building lakes

sentences which T reads is right and keep silent if it wrong Repeat silent Repeat Work in pairs to practice the structure following example exchange : S1: Are there any[ forests] in Viet nam? S2: Yes/ No, there are.

IV Consolidation: Check vocabulary and the structure have lots of + nouns V, Homework: 27 Do ex 1,2 P.130 28 Prepare Lesson 6

Date : 20 /4/2007 Period 96 Unit15

countries Lesson 6: C3 P. 165

A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be understand the text about the worlds great rives and mountains to skim for details and get further practice in using comparatives and superlatives I Knowledges: .comparatives and superlatives II Skills: Reading III Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. Asks Ss to write sentences with the cue words Viet nam /have /lots of/ rain III,New lesson: 214

Teacher's activities 1 Revision: Wordsquare -Asks Ss to find out the words in the box R I V E R S W C M S T A R T S H E L B E A C H I T R E E I G I N E I R O N E G A 215

Students' activities Work in individually to find out the words

Listen and repeat in choral, in groups, and in individually Then copy down on their notebooks

Work in groups to play this game

Work in groups to predict these sentences are T or F

Work in pairs to read the text to check their predictions and then read the text again to answer the question in the text book

R G L O T S H I S D L R O W X F Answer keys : great, long world girl meters, rain, high, China, of, or river, rivers starts, beach, tree, in, lots , on 2 Pre-reading: *Pre -teach: the sea (picture): bin Tibet ( translation): ty tng (to ) flow to ( mime): cha North Afica: bc m -T uses the techniques to elicit each word -T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually -T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress -T asks Ss to copy Check : What and Where the sea Tibet North Afica

Work in groups to play the game

T/ F predictions: -Asks Ss to predict these sentences are T or F 1. There are two great rivers in viet nam. 2 The Red river is longer than the Mekong river . 3 The Red river and the Mekong both start in China 4 The longest river in the world os not in Viet nam 5 Phanxipang is the hightest mountain in the world 3While -reading : C3 p.165 -Asks Ss to read the text to check their prediction s Answer keys : 1T 2F 3F 4 T 5 F -Asks Ss to read the text again to answer the question in the text book C3 P. 165 216

Answer keys a.The Mekong river b. The Mekong starts in Tibet c. The Nile river is the longest in the world d. The Nile river flow to the Mediterrrannean sea E Moun Everest is the highest mountain in the world f Phanxipang is the highest mountain in Viet nam 4 Post-reading : Lucky number -Asks Ss to play this game by amswering these questions . a. LN b. What are the two great rivers in Viet nam ? c. Where does the Red river start ? d. LN e. What does the Red river flow to ? f. W hat does the Nile start and flow to ? g. LN h. Make a sentences about the lonhest river in Viet nam? IV Consolidation: Check vocabulary V, Homework: 29 Do ex 3 P.130 30 Prepare unit 16 Lesson 1

Date: 19/4/2007 Period 97 Unit 16 countries Lesson 1 :A1-3 P 166-167 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk about food with countable and uncountable quantifiers I.Knowledges : a lot, a little, a few II. Skill: speaking III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : I. Settlement II.Checking : . III. New lesson: Teachers activities Students activities 1 Revision : Jumble Words: -Asks Ss to rewrite the words in the order toespota = potatoes , gegs = eggs , werflos = flowers motatoes = tomatoes , icer = ucer , nonios = onions tableveges = vegetables 217

Work in groups to rewrite the words in the order

2.Presentation : Presentation text : A1 p.166 -Reads the text, asks Ss to listen to the text and practice the text Model sentences : a. How much rice is there ? There is some A lot of A little rice b. How many eggs are there ? There are some Alot of eggs A few

Ss listen , and practice the text ,then give examples Ss copy down on their notebook

Work in pairs to match 3 Practice : Matching A3 P.167 - Asks Ss to match the sentences to the Answer keys : 1 d 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 e Picture drill: A1 p.166 and A3 P.167 -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange : S 1: How much rice is there? S2: There is alot/ lots S1: How many onions are there ? S2 : There are a few Work in pairs to to practice the structure following example exchange : S1: How much ricwe is there? S2: There is alot/ lots S1: How many onions are there ? S2 : There are afew Work in groups to play chain game

4 Production : Chain game : -Asks Ss to play chain game Example : S1 : There is a little rice S2 : There is a little rice, and some tomatoes S3 : There is a little rice, some tomatoes and a few eggs

IV. Consolidation: Vocabulary V. Homework: Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)

218

Date: 19/4/2007 Period 98 Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT Lesson 2 :A2 P 166-167 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas of the text about farming and getting further practice in alot, alittle, a few I.Knowledges : a lot, a little, a few II. Skill: reading III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : Settlement Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : . III. New lesson: Teachers activities Students activities 1 Revision : Noughts and crosses : -Asks Ss to play the game ,use ''There [is a little rice]'' a dozen eggs 1/2 kilo onions 1 kilo fruit two potatoes 100 g rice 2 tomatoes 1/2 a glass of milk 4 kilos vegetables 2 flowers

Work in groups to play the game ,use ''There [is a little rice]''

2.Pre-reading : Pre-teach animals (picture): a buffalow (picture): a cow (picture): ( to ) flow (picture): (to ) pull a cart (picture): (to ) grow (picture): (to ) procedure (picture): - T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check: Net work animals grow on the farm

Ss listen and repeat in chorus and then individually Ss copy down on their notebook

Work in individually to write vocab

219

fruit / rice / vegetables

procedure Work in groups to predict 6 things Mr Hai has on his farm and 5 things he has procedures

*open -prediction : -Asks Ss to predict 6 things Mr Hai has on his farm and 5 things he has procedures with answer keys Mr Hai has Mr Hai procedures 1 paddy fields rice 2 a small vegetable field vegetables 3 fruit trees fruit 4 buffalow milk 5 cows eggs 6 chickens 3 While -reading: -Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions. - asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions 3 Practice : Matching A3 P.167 - Asks Ss to match the sentences to the picture Answer keys : 1 d 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 e Picture drill: A1 p.166 and A3 P.167 -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange : S 1: How much rice is there? S2: There is alot/ lots S1: How many onions are there ? S2 : There are afew 4 Production : Chain game : -Asks Ss to play chain game Example : S1 : There is a little rice S2 : There is a little rice, and some tomatoes S3 : There is a little rice, some tomatoes and a few eggs IV. Consolidation: Vocabulary V. Homework: Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)

Listen and reads the text to check their predictions work in pairs to match the sentences to the picture Work in pairs to practice the structure following example exchange : S1: How much rice is there? S2: There is alot/ lots S1: How many onions are there ? S2 : There are a few Work in groups to play chain game

220

Date: 29/4/2007 Period 99 Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT Lesson 3 :A4-5 P 168 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas in terms of cause and effectof the text about the environment I.Knowledges : Why ...? Because ...... II. Skill: reading III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : Settlement Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : Asks Ss to write voca . III. New lesson: Teachers activities Students activities 1 Revision :matching -Asks Ss to match Viet namese with EL words the population rng forests trng the world nng dn farmer grow dn s fields con vt food thc n animals th gii 2.Pre-reading : Pre-teach land (picture): t ai plants(picture): thc vt ( to )burn (picture): t chy (to ) destroy( translation): ph hu (to ) cut down (synomyn: grow ): cht ph in danger( example): mi nguy him - T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check: What and where land destroy plants in danger burn cut down Work in groups order the words 5-3- 2- 6 -1-7 221

Work in groups to match Viet namese with EL words

Ss listen and repeat in chorus and then individually Ss copy down on their notebook

Work in groups to play this game

 ordering: -Asks Ss order the words 1.produce 2.cut down 3. more food 4. burn 5. grow 6. make new fields 7. animals and plants in danger. 3 While -reading: A4 p. 168 -Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions. - asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions Answer keys : 1. Because we grow trees 2. Because we need wood 3. Because we are destroyingthe forests 4 Post -reading : Picture story Asks Ss to retell story,using their words

Listen and reads the text to check their predictions Then answer the questions

Work in groups to retell story,using their words

IV. Consolidation: Vocabulary V. Homework: Prepare Unit 16 Lesson4 Do ex (work book)

222

Date: 29/4 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT Lesson 4 :B1 P 169 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas about the pollution I.Knowledges : pollution vocabulary II. Skill: reading III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : Settlement Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : Asks Ss to write voca . III. New lesson: Teachers activities Students activities 1 Revision :STB -Asks Ss to play this game ph hu n cy t chy sn xut cy convt t ai Work in groups to match Viet namese with EL words Period 100 Unit 16

mi nguy him

2.Pre-reading : Pre-teach The enviroment (trasnlation): mi trng The ocean (synomyn: sea ): i dng ( to) pollute (example):oo nhim (to) waste (translation): lng ph the air(example): khng kh coal( realia): than oil( realia):du gas (translation): ga power (example ): - T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check: What and where gas the air oil waste coal ocean power

Ss listen and repeat in chorus and then individually Ss copy down on their notebook

Work in groups to play this game

Work in groups to predict the 223

 Pre questions -Predict : -Asks SS to predict the answers with answer keys 1.What are we destroying ? - forests, wild animals, plants 2.What are we wasting ? - water, coal, oil , gas 3. What are we polluting ? - the air, the land, the rivers, the oceans 3 While -reading: B1 P.169 -Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions. - asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions Answer keys : 4. a. Because we are destroying 5. b. Gases is polluting the air 6. c. 4 Post -reading : Write it up -Asks Ss to use the predict pre questions to make a list of donts Example : Dont destroy our environment Dont destroy the forest Dont destroy the plants Dont destroythe wild animals Dont waste water Dont pollute the air Dont pollute the oceans IV. Consolidation: Vocabulary V. Homework: Prepare Unit 16 Lesson 5 Do ex (work book)

answers

Listen and reads the text to check their predictions Then answer the questions

Work in groups to use the predict pre questions to make a list of donts

Date: 29/4 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT Lesson 5 :B2 P 170-171 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to give advice about protecting the environment I.Knowledges : Should and shouldnt. II. Skill: Speaking III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : 224 Period 101 Unit 16

Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : Asks Ss to write voca III. New lesson: Teachers activities

Settlement

Students activities

1 Revision :Noughts and crosses -Asks Ss to play this game by using Dont ....... plants water the air power forests wild animals coal the oceans trash

Work in groups to play this game by using Dont ....... Example : Dont destroy plants

Example : Dont destroy plants 2.Presentation :B2 P.170-171 -Reads the text , asks Ss to guess the new words from context with answer keys (to) throw = nm (to) pick = nht (to) damage= ph hu, lm hng (to) keep off = trnh khi (to) save = tit kim (to) collect = thu gom -Asks Ss to match the rulres with these signs Answer keys : a- picture c b- picture f c- picture a d- picture h e- picture e f- picture b g - pictureg h- picture d *Model sentences : We should collect paper Save water We shouldnt throw trash on the streets damage trees. 3 Practice: -Asks Ss to match and write these sentences with should and shouldnt 7. Example : 8. We should collect paper Should damage trash 9. collect trees 10. throw paper Shouldnt save flowers 11. pick bottles and cans Picture drill : -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example S1: We shouldnt [ damage trees ] S2: Thats right 4 Further practice : Noughts and crosses 225

Ss listen and guess the new words from context

Work in individually tomatch the rulres with these signs

Listen and copy donw the sentences Work in individually to match and write these sentences with should and shouldnt We should collect paper We shouldnt throw trash

Work in pairs to practice the structure following example S1: We shouldnt [ damage trees ] S2: Thats right

-Asks Ss to play this game damage save destroy pollute

waster collect pick

Work in groups to play this game

throw cut down Example : We should/shouldnt .... IV. Consolidation: Vocabulary V. Homework: Prepare Unit 16 Lesson 5 Do ex (work book)

Date: 2/5/2007 Period 103 Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT Lesson 5 :B2 P 170-171 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice present simple and progressive , comparative and superlatives, quantifiers and countability. I.Knowledges : Country, natural features, farming and environment vocabulary. II.Skill: Speaking and writing III.Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : I.Settlement Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : . III. New lesson: Teachers activities Students activities 1. Countries and Languages: *Simple present : -T recalls the way to use this tense Form: S + V-s/es Uses: miu t hnh ng thng xuyn xy ra Countries and Languages Japanese Japan -Ask ss to do exercise 1p.174 (text book) Answerkey: 226 T-Whole class

Work in groups to to do exercise 1p.174 (text book)

a.Are... from/ Am not/ speak b.Speaks c.Is Chinese e.Is Vietnamese d.Is Japanese f.Is American 2.Present simple and present progressive: +Mapped dialouge: ........name? Susan ........Live ? London .......Stay now? Hanoi .......do ? Teacher What....teach ? English ......teach you? No, .....Mr Hai Answer key: 1.What is her name? 2.Where does she live? 3.Where is she staying now? 4.What does she do? 5.What does she teach? 6.Does she teach you? -ask ss to do the exercise 2 P.174 (text book) 3.Adj: Comparative and superlatives: -Asks Ss to complete the table and then complete the passages. Long Longer Longest Short Tall Small Big High Thick a. The Mekong river is long. The Amazon river is ...than the Mekong. The Nile river is.....river in the world. b. The Great Wall of China is long. It is... ... structure in the world c. Sears Tower in Chicago is tall, but it isnt .... ... building in the world. Petronas twin Tower in Kuala Lumpur is .... than Sears Tower. It is ... ... building in the world. d. Ha noi is gig, bt it is not the .... city in Viet nam. HCMC is ... than Hanoi. It is ... city invietnam. But Mexico city is.. ...city in the world. 227

Work in pairs to mapped the dialouge

Work in individually to complete the table and then complete the passages.

IV. Consolidation: Vocabulary V. Homework:

228